Home

User`s Manual Series F4S/D

1. 3 11 Operations Page Parameter Record 3 15 Series FAS D Operation The Series F 4S D controller can function as either a static set point controller or as a profile con troller The information shown on the Lower Dis play during operation the Main Page is pro grammable and can be customized to support both modes of operation See Setup Page In either the static set point mode or the profile mode the Series F4 can only be operated in a closed loop configuration Manual operation open loop mode is not allowed Static Set Point Control The Series F4 is in static mode when it is not con trolling a ramping profile When in static mode The Profile Indicator Light is off The Upper Display shows the actual process temperature of input 1 2 or 3 depending upon Setup Page configuration v NOTE All control activity stops when you enter the Setup Page Analog Input Digital Input Control Output Alarm Out put Retransmit and Digital Output menus TheLower Display shows the default or user configured information set See the Setup Chapter for instructions in programming the Main Page to display the information you want To operate the Series F4 as a static set point con troller use the navigation keys O to select the preferred channel and adjust the set point Static Set Pointl ETE AV Adjusts Value lt Back gt Next Limits may be placed on the set point in the Set
2. DERE BIRRE DOSES OS E oooo000000000000 agoooooooooo0n BumssH 08888 SBaeagaqaq ooo0o00000000000 0000 pnananmnanani BuumuH EBHEBHBH EBBB8HBH unnnaananannang 12 4 Wiring Watlow Series FAS D AN WARNING To avoid damage to property and equipment and or injury of loss of life use National Electric Code NEC standard wiring practices to install and operate the Series F4 Failure to do so could result in such damage and or injury or death AN CAUTION Maintain isolation between analog inputs 2 and 3 and between analog input 1 and digital inputs 1 to 4 to prevent a ground loop A ground loop may cause incorrect readings Failure to follow this guideline could result in damage to equipment and product Inputs x 2 and 3 continued Figure 12 5a 0 to 5V 1 to 5V or 0 to 10V dc Process FAS Input impedance 20kQ Input 2 6 orF4D oooo Cooooooooooont Figure 12 5 0 to 20mA or 4 to 20mA Process F4S_ ___ 6 ____ or F4D_ Input impedance 100Q BHBUEBHH BHEB amp SsS Beaaq Input 2 n mmanaannnan Figure 12 5c 0 to 50mV FAS 6 Impedance 20M O Input 2 HBgGcHBEH B8eaaq doooooooooo00000 Watlow Series F4S D Wiring 12 5 A WARNING To avoid damage to property and equipment and or injury of loss of life use National Electric
3. ooooo00000000000 ooo00000 ooo00000 Oooo nooo goo0o0000 ooo0 Watlow Series F4S D Wiring 12 7 Figure 12 8a 0 to 20mA 4 to 20mA 0 to 5V 1 to 5V and 0 to NOTE 10V dc Process Switching inductive loads relay coils solenoids etc with the mechanical relay switched dc or solid state relay output options requires use of an R C suppressor Watlow carries the R C suppressor Quencharc brand name which is a trademark of ITW Paktron Watlow Part No 0804 0147 0000 Output 1A Output 1B Output 2A Output 2B 33 amps 35 volts ooo ooo Una eooooooooooonong Una Dna Dna ooo ooo ooo oooo0000 00000000 oooooo0000000000 pnrnmnaennmnnn nooooooo 00000000 ooooo00000000000 Dnnonana nona ooo00000 Dona Dnonanana nona Retransmit and Alarm Output AN Figure 12 8b Retransmit Outputs x 1 and 2 WARNING To avoid damage to property and equipment and or injury of loss of Output 1 Output 2 life use National Electric Code NEC standard wiring practices to install and operate the Series F4 Failure to do so could result in such damage and or injury or death mA maximum load impedance 8009 volts dc minimum load impedance 1kQ BHBEHE EBEHBBHBS 52008688E eaoooooooooon ooo ooooooooo000 monomono nua Figure 12 8c Alarm Outputs x 1 and 2 Alarm Outp
4. Time In Seconds 0 Cool Power Boost Percent Power 85 85 100 Boost Delay Time 30 Seconds l 0 Boost Cool 0 Figure 6 10a Boost Heat and Boost Cool Power Heat 100 2 Compressor 2i a a wy Gir Paw 0 N Compressor On Power Cool 100 Time In Seconds E Compressor On Delay 45 Seconds Compressor On USO D 4 Compressor Off Delay 20 Seconds Figure 6 10b Compressor Power 6 10 Features Watlow Series F4S D Cascade Cascade control is a control strategy in which one control loop provides the set point for another loop It allows the process or part temperature to be reached quickly while minimizing overshoot Cas cade is used to optimize the performance of thermal systems with long lag times This graph illustrates a thermal system with a long lag time Curve A represents a single loop control system with PID parameters that allow a maximum heat up rate Too much energy is introduced and the set point is overshot In most systems with long lag time the process value may never settle out to an acceptable error Curve C represents a single control system tuned to minimize overshoot This results in unacceptable heat up rates taking hours to reach the final value Curve B shows a cascade system that limits the energy introduced into the system allowing an optimal heat up rate with minimal over shoot Cascade
5. a Time Figure 6 8 Alarm Settings 6 8 Features Watlow Series F4S D Alarm Latching A latched alarm will remain active after the alarm condition has passed It can only be deactivated by the user An alarm that is not latched self clear ing will deactivate automatically when the alarm condition has passed Location in software Setup Page gt Alarm x 1 or 2 Alarm Silencing Alarm silencing has two uses 1 Itis often used to allow a system to warm up after it has been started up With alarm silenc ing on an alarm is not triggered when the pro cess temperature is initially lower than the alarm low set point The process temperature has to enter the normal operating range beyond the hysteresis zone to activate the alarm func tion 2 Alarm silencing also allows the operator to dis able the alarm output while the controller is in an alarm state The process temperature has to enter the normal operating range beyond the hysteresis zone to activate the alarm output function If the Series F4 has an output that is functioning as a deviation alarm the alarm is silenced when the set point is changed until the process value re enters the normal operating range Location in software Setup Page gt Alarm x 1 or 2 Alarm Sides Alarms can be configured to trigger when the pro cess exceeds the High Alarm Set Point the Low Alarm Set Point or both Location in software Setup Page gt Alarm x 1 or
6. gt Continue Holding Resume Terminate v NOTE When a profile is resumed during a Ramp step the con troller uses the Static Set Point from the Main Page to calculate the rate of change needed to get to the set point at the end of the step When a profile is resumed in a soak step the new set point value will be used as the soak value for the time remaining in the step HOG Prorilas Don t Hold Hold gt Terminate v NOTE The Profile Status message takes precedence over all oth er information except errors alarm messages and input status Errors and alarm messages always take prece dence over Profile Status The Profile Key functions only from the Main Page It will not function from any of the other pages Operations Profile Setup or Factory Watlow Series F4S D Operations 3 3 Alarm Set Points The Series F4 includes two alarm outputs which can be programmed as process or deviation alarms Process alarms notify the operator when process values exceed or fall below Alarm Low and Alarm High Set Points Deviation alarms notify the opera tor when the process has deviated from the set point beyond the deviation limits For more infor mation see the Features Chapter To set up the alarms see the Setup Chapter Alarm set points are the points at which alarms switch on or off depending on the alarm setting Alarm set points can be viewed or changed in the Alarm Set Point Menus Operations Page
7. 1514 w Active Always YNOTE Must be in the Calibra tion or Test Menu at the display for this prompt to work via com munications 1513 w Active Always 1602 w Active Always 10 4 Diagnostics Watlow Series F4S D 11 Chapter Eleven Installation Dimensions ae 0 020 in 0 5 mm maximum gap between controller front panel and mouning panel l Figure 11 1a Front View Dimensions and Gasket Gap Dimension 4 189 in DO dumm a 660 in 97 8 mm 4 264 in 108 3 mm 0 339 in 8 6 mm Figure 11 1b Side and Top View and Dimensions Watlow Series FAS D Installation 11 1 Panel Dimensions 3 930 in WATLOW I b LI F P T EU to PET 0 ane 3 930 in Go to Setup E wane Go to Factory Y A 99 8 mm e 3 62 to 3 65 in 4 92 to 93 mm Panel Cutout Panel Thickness 3 62 to 3 651 in 92 to 93 mm 0 375 in maximum 9 5 mm 0 675 in 17 6 mm minimum 0 625 in 16 mm popu Figure 11 2a Multiple Panel Cutout Dimensions Installing the Installing the Series FA Controller Fl Installing and mounting requires access to the back of the panel Tools required one 2 Phillips screwdriver 1 Make the panel cutout using the mounting template dimensions in this chapter 2 Insert the controller into the panel cutout Check that the rubber gasket lies in its slot at the back of the bezel Slide the ret
8. 5 a 98 2 _ E E 5 96 E a t E a 2 ES 94 92 90 i Test Period in Hours E 3 do d d Step 01 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 d Channel 1 e e I End of test Channel2 O O Step 20 jumps to Step 3 and repeats 20 times Figure 9b Graph of Military Standard 810D Test Watlow Series F4S D Profile Programming 4 9 Frequently Asked Questions About Profiles 1 Why should I check the Setup Page before programming a profile Complex sophisticated profile control is possible with the Series F 4 s two or three analog inputs four digital inputs four control outputs two for a single channel controller two alarm outputs two retransmit outputs and eight digital outputs but they must be configured correctly Don t assume that the controller has been set up correctly for the profile you want to program and run Checking the Setup Page first will save time 2 Why can t program a Ramp Rate step on Channel 2 Ramp Rate is available only on single channel con trollers 3 Why can t I set the Channel 2 parameters Channel 2 parameters do not appear in single channel controllers or Input 2 is Off in a dual channel controller 4 Why can t adjust the set point to get the value want Check the configuration of the inputs Setup Page and the set point limits Setup Page 5 Why don t
9. Ajax Testing Co selected a version of Military Standard Test 810D which is often used to test navigational or other military equipment under hot humid conditions The full test requires a two channel controller to manipu late both temperature and humidity in an environmental chamber Andy planned his profile on the User Profile Record after checking the Setup Page to make sure the con troller s inputs outputs limits and ranges were config ured properly Andy then programmed the profile into the Series F4 This profile is embedded in the Series F4 software for use as a teaching tool and as a template To see how it is programmed in steps and how each step is defined go to the Profiles Page choose Edit Profile and open MILSTD 810D If your Series F4 is a single channel con troller you will see only the temperature on Channel 1 This is NOT the true Mili tary Standard Test 810D Military Standard 810D Step 1 Ramp Time Initialize the set point for channels 1 and 2 Step 2 Soak Wait for channels 1 and 2 process values to reach their set points before the test proceeds Step 3 Soak To ensure that the equipment temperature has stabilized expose the equipment in the chamber to a temperature of 88 F and an RH of 88 for five hours Steps 4to 11 Ramp Time The test calls for a programmed increase in temperature and decrease in relative humidity over a period of eight hours Step 12 Soak Expo
10. Operations Edit PID Limit access to this menu Operations Alarm Set Point Limit access to this menu Profile Page Limit access to this page Setup Page Limit access to this page Factory Page Limit access to this page Set Change Password Reset or change password Choose Yes to change the password Clear Locks Unlock set point and all pages and menus Full Access 0 Read Only 1 Full Access 0 Read Only 1 Password 2 Hidden 3 Full Access 0 Read Only 1 Password 2 Hidden 3 Full Access 0 Read Only 1 Password 2 Hidden 3 Full Access 0 Read Only 1 Password 2 Hidden 3 Full Access 0 Read Only 1 Password 2 Hidden 3 Full Access 0 Read Only 1 Password 2 Yes 0 No 1 Yes 0 Default Full Access Full Access Full Access Full Access Full Access Full Access Full Access NOTE For more information about how parameter settings affect the controller s operation see the Features Chapter Modbus Register read write I O Set Ch 1300 r w 1306 r w 1307 r w 1308 r w 1309 r w 1302 r w 1303 r w 1314 r w 1315 w Conditions for Parameters to Appear Active Always Active Always Active Always Active Always Active Always Active Always Active Always Active Always Watlow Series FAS D Security and Locks 8 3 Notes 8 4 Security and Locks
11. i f 4024 Wait For Analog 2 Value Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps 4102 Profile Step Type Current Status r w Range Low to Range High r Tv Ramp Time 4026 Wait For Analog 3 Value Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps 2 Ramp Rate 3 Soak rw Range Low to Range High 4 Jump 4025 Wait For Analog 3 Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps 5 End rw 0 Don t Wait 4108 Profile Waiting for Analog Input 1 Current Status 1 Wait r 0 Dont Wait 4013 Wait For Event 1 Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps 1 Wait riw 0 Don t Wait i m 1 Wait for Off sy 09 RETE tor Analog Input 2 Current Status 2 Wait for On 1 Wait 4014 Wait For Event 2 Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps 4110 Profile Waiting for Analog Input 3 Current Status rw 0 Don t Wait sE Nai 1 Wait for Off r 0 Don t Wait 1 Wait 2 Wait for On 4104 Profile Waiting for Event 1 Current Status 4015 Wait For Event 3 Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps rw 0 Don t Wait r 0 Don t Wait 1 Wait for Off 1 Wait for Off 2 Waitf 2 Wait for On i Bn 4105 Profile Waiting for Event 2 Current Status 4016 Wait For Event 4 Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps rw 0 Don t Wait r 0 Don t Wait 1 Wait for Off 1 Wait for Off 2 Wait for On BA 4106 Profile Waiting for Event 3 Current Status 4012 Wait Don t Wait Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps rw 0 Don t Wait r 0 Don t Wait 1 Waitf 1 Wait for Off are 2 Wait for On 4107 Profile Waiting for Event 4 Current Status rw 0 Don t Wa
12. toadjust the display to the reading on the volt ammeter The controller should stabilize within one second Repeat until the volt amme ter reads 4 000mA Press to store the value Press the Right Key at the Calibrate Rexmit 1 prompt At the 20 000mA prompt press once UsetheUp Key or the Down Key toadjust the display to the reading on the volt ammeter The controller should stabi lize within one second Repeat until the volt ammeter reads 20 000mA Press to store the value Volts 5 8 Connect the volt ammeter to terminals 48 and 49 Press the Right Key at the Calibrate Rexmit 1 prompt At the 1 000V prompt press once UsetheUp Key or the Down Key toadjust the display to the reading on the volt ammeter The controller should stabilize within one second Repeat until the volt amme ter reads 1 000V Press to store the value Press the Right Key at the Calibrate Rexmit 1 prompt At the 10 000V prompt press once UsetheUp Key or the Down Key toadjust the display to the reading on the volt ammeter The controller should stabilize within one second Repeat until the volt amme ter reads 10 000V Press to store the value Rewire for operation and verify calibration Retransmit 2 Setup and Calibration 1 Connect the correct power supply to terminals Calibration Menu Map Calibrate Calibrate Calibrate Calibrate Calibrate Calibrate Calibrate Calibrate Rexmit 1
13. See the Wiring Chapter 5 Run the Profile Andy pressed the Profile K ey and selected the test profile He monitored the progress of the test on the display and the equipment temperature on the chart recorder See the Operations Chapter Figure 1 2 Sample Application 1 Series F4 Dual Channel Using Multiple Inputs and Outputs Watlow Series FAS D Main Page Go to Profiles PGo to Setup Go to Factory 2 Set up the F4 After checking the navigation instructions in the user manual Andy went to the Setup Page of the software to configure the controller for the equipment and the ramp ing profiles He named the alarm to make it easier to identify an alarm condition The alarm message will appear on the Lower Display which also informs about the progress of the test See the Keys Displays and Navigation Chapter See the Setup Chapter WATLOW Main Page o X Step 1 Ramp Time Go to Factory as Step 2 Ramp Time Step 3 Soak Step 4 Jump Choose to Setup Digital Output8 Communications Custom Main Page 3 Customize and Name Andy customized the Main Page so he could tell the status of the digital outputs by glanc ing at the controller s Lower Display Setup Page gt Custom Main Page Menu He also named one of theAlarms TEMP DEV which will make it easy to identify the alarm condition Setup Page Alarm Output 1 Menu Three digital inputs two alarms and eight digital outputs can be given 1
14. The Alarm High Set Point defines the high tem perature that if exceeded will trigger an alarm This temperature must be higher than the alarm low set point and lower than the high limit of the sensor range The Alarm Low Set Point defines the low tem perature that if exceeded will trigger an alarm This temperature must be lower than the alarm high set point and higher than the low limit of the sensor range v TIP You may want to set up the alarms with names that will identify the alarm conditions See the Setup Page To Clear an Alarm or Error In an alarm condition an alarm message will ap pear on the Main Page if this option has been se lected on the Setup Page To silence it move the cursor to the alarm message and press the Right Key A pop up message will confirm the silenc ing of the alarm and the indicator light will go off When the condition causing the error or alarm is corrected return to the error or alarm message on the Main Page and press the Right Key again A pop up message confirms the alarm is unlatched Auto tune PID In autotuning the controller automatically selects the PID parameters for optimal control based on the thermal response of the system In the Series FA five sets of PID values are available for each channel of the controller sets 1 to 5 for channel 1 and sets 6 to 10 for channel 2 Default PID values exist for all PID sets although these values typi cally do not provi
15. once at the Calibrate Input 3 prompt Factory Page At the 20 000mA prompt press onc and to store the 20 000mA input press once 11 Rewire for operation and verify calibration Process Output Procedure Equipment e Precision volt ammeter with 3 5 digit resolu tion Output 1A Setup and Calibration 1 Connect the correct power supply to terminals 1 2 and 3 see the Wiring Chapter and the Appendix Milliamperes 2 Connect the volt ammeter to terminals 42 and 43 3 Press the Right Key at the Calibrate Out put 1A prompt At the 4 000mA prompt press once Use the Up Key O or the Down Key OQ to adjust the display to the reading on the volt ammeter The controller should stabilize within one second Repeat until the volt amme ter reads 4 000mA Press to store the value 4 Press the Right Key at the Calibrate Out put 1A prompt At the 20 000mA prompt press once UsetheUp Key or the Down Key toadjust the display to the reading on the volt ammeter The controller should stabilize within one second Repeat until the volt amme ter reads 20 000mA Press to store the val ue Volts 5 Connect the volt ammeter to terminals 44 and 43 6 Press the Right Key at the Calibrate Out put 1A prompt At the 1 000V prompt press once Use the Up Key O or the Down Key OQ to adjust the display to the reading on the volt ammeter The controller should stabilize within one s
16. or the Down Key toadjust the display to the reading on the volt ammeter The controller should stabilize within one second Repeat until the volt amme ter reads 20 000mA Press to store the val ue Volts 5 Connect the volt ammeter to terminals 35 and 34 6 PresstheRight Key at the Calibrate Out put 2B prompt At the 1 000V prompt press once Usethe Up Key O or the Down Key OQ to adjust the display to the reading on the volt ammeter The controller should stabilize within one second Repeat until the volt amme ter reads 1 000V Press to store the value 7 Press the Right Key at the Calibrate Out put 2B prompt At the 10 000V prompt press once Usethe Up Key O or the Down Key OQ to adjust the display to the reading on the volt ammeter The controller should stabilize within one second Repeat until the volt amme ter reads 10 000V Press to store the value 8 Rewire for operation and verify calibration Retransmit Output Procedure Equipment e Precision volt ammeter with 3 5 digit resolu tion Retransmit 1 Setup and Calibration 1 Connect the correct power supply to terminals 1 2 and 3 see the Wiring Chapter and the Appendix Milliamperes 2 Connect the volt ammeter to terminals 50 and 49 3 Press the Right Key at the Calibrate Rexmit 1 prompt At the 4 000mA prompt press once UsetheUp Key or the Down Key Watlow Series F4S D Calibration 9 5
17. r w 1to 40 1082 Digital Input 4 Start Step rw 1 to 256 2000 Digital Output 1 Condition rw 0 Off 1 On 2001 Digital Output 1 Function rw 0 Off 1 Event Output 2010 Digital Output 2 Condition rw 0 Off 1 On 2011 Digital Output 2 Function rw 0 Off 1 Event Output 2020 Digital Output 3 Condition rw 0 Off 1 On 2021 Digital Output 3 Function rw 0 Off 1 Event Output 2030 Digital Output 4 Condition rw 0 Off 1 On 2031 Digital Output 4 Function rw 0 Off 1 Event Output 2040 Digital Output 5 Condition rw 0 Off 1 On 2041 Digital Output 5 Function rw 0 Off 1 Event Output 2 Complementary Output 2946 r w 2050 r w 2051 r w 2060 r w 2061 r w 2070 r w 2071 r w 2072 r w 2073 r w 2074 r w 2055 r w 1513 1307 r w 607 r w 617 r w 627 r w 1303 r w 604 r w 614 r w 624 r w 1602 1205 r w 1212 r w 1220 r w 1221 r w 714 r w 731 r w Control Output 0 1A 1 1B 2 2A 3 2B Digital Output 6 Condition 0 Off 1 On Digital Output 6 Function 0 Off 1 Event Output 3 Boost Heat Digital Output 7 Condition 0 Off 1 On Digital Output 7 Function P NOTES 0 Off For more information 1 Event Output 4 Boost Cool about parameters see Digital Output 8 Condition the Index 0 Off 1 On Digital Output 8 Function 0 Off 1 Event Output 5 Compressor Power On Value Power Off Value Delay On Value Delay Off Value Display Test Test 0 Off 1 On Edi
18. tive and negative values American Wire Gauge AWG A standard of the dimensional characteristics of wire used to con duct electrical current or signals AWG is identical to the Brown and Sharpe B amp S wire gauge auto tune A feature that automatically sets temperature control PID values to match a particu lar thermal system battery BR1225 retains volatile memory Seven year shelf life indefinite life with power applied to unit baud rate The rate of information transfer in serial communications measured in bits per second burst fire A power control method that repeat edly turns on and off full ac cydes Also called zero cross fire it switches dose to the zero voltage point of the ac sine wave Variable time base burst fire selectively holds or transits ac cycles to achieve the desired power level See zero cross calibration accuracy Closeness between the value indicated by a measuring instrument and a physical constant or known standard calibration offset An adjustment to eliminate the difference between the indicated value and the actual process value cascade Control algorithm in which the output of one control loop provides the set point for anoth er loop The second loop in turn determines the control action CE A manufacturer s mark that demonstrates compliance with European Union EU laws gov erning products sold in Europe chatter The rapid on off cyc
19. 0 No Cascade 0 DIGIT IN1 Modbus Register read write I O Set Ch Input 603 1 613 2 623 3 r w Input 605 1 615 2 625 3 r w Input 604 1 614 2 624 3 r w Input 607 1 617 2 627 3 r w 1925 r w 1926 r w 1927 r w 1926 r w 1927 r w 3000 3009 3010 3019 3020 3029 3030 3039 r w Conditions for Parameters to Appear Active Always except when Cas cade is set to Process Cascade or Deviation Cascade this is masked for Analog Input 1 Active Always Active Always Active Always Active if Analog Input 3 is not set to Off variable selection only Active if Input 3 is not set to off and Process Cascade is selected Active if Input 3 is not set to off and Process Cascade is selected Active if Input 3 is not set to off and Deviation Cascade is selected Active if Input 3 is not set to off and Deviation Cascade is selected Active Always 5 10 Setup Watlow Series F4S D Setup Page Parameter Table Parameter Description Function Select the digital input function Condition Select the condition to trigger digital input Range Modbus Value Off 0 Panel Lock 1 Reset Alarm 2 Control Outputs Off 3 All Outputs Off 4 Digital Outputs Off 5 Start Profile 6 Pause Profile 7 Resume Profile 8 Terminate Profile 9 Wait for Event 10 Low 0 High 1 Default Off 0 Low 0 Control Output x 1A
20. 2 wire jumper 60 to 62 Figure 12 3c 0 5V 1 5V or 0 10V dc Process Available on all units Input impedance 20kQ BBHBHBEB BBSEBHHBS BBBBH n nnanaanaaanana pnamanoammana Figure 12 3d 0 20mA or 4 20mA Process Available on all units Input impedance 1000 ddanaaganiana nnnm ooo00000 E Figure 12 3e 0 to 50mV Available on all units Impedance 20M O Be Ses HgGSHEBS SBHBSHBH ooooo00000000000 primmanoncaama Watlow Series FAS D Wiring 12 3 AN WARNING To avoid damage to property and equipment and or injury of loss of life use National Electric Code NEC standard wiring practices to install and operate the Series F4 Failure to do so could result in such damage and or injury or death A CAUTION Maintain isolation between analog inputs 2 and 3 and between analog input 1 and digital inputs 1 to 4 to prevent a ground loop A ground loop may cause incorrect readings Failure to follow this guideline could result in damage to equipment and product Inputs x 2 and 3 Figure 12 4a Thermocouple FAS Impedance 20M O Input 2 Figure 12 4b RTD 2 wire 1000 Platinum FAS 6 Input 2 jumper 54 to 58 Figure 12 4c RTD 3 wire 100Q Platinum FAS 6 Input 2 Der orFAD orFAD Input 3 jumper 52 to 56 orFAD
21. 8 2537 2587 9 2547 2597 10 r w Conditions for Parameters to Appear Active if Proportional Band is not set to 0 and one output is set to heat and the other to cool Setup Page Active if Proportional Band is set to 0 and one channel is set to heat and the other to cool Setup Page Cascade Outer Loop PID Set x 1 to 5 Main Operations Edit PID Cascade Outer Loop PID Set X 1 to 5 Proportional Band x A or B 0 to 30000 25 F 25 Define the propor 0 to 30000 14 C 14 tional band for PID control Integral x A or B 0 00 to 99 99 minutes 0 minutes Set the integral time 0 to 9999 0 in minutes Reset x A or B 0 00 per minute to 0 per minute 99 99 per minute 0 Set the reset time in 0 to 9999 repeats per minute 1A 1B S 2600 2650 1 2610 2660 2 2620 2670 3 2630 2680 4 2640 2690 5 r w 1A 1B Set 2601 2651 1 2611 2661 2 2621 2671 3 2631 2681 4 2641 2691 5 r w 1A 1B S 2602 2652 1 2612 2662 2 2622 2672 3 2632 2682 4 2642 2692 5 r w 1A 1B 2603 2653 2613 2663 Active Always Channel 1 F Default for US C Default for SI Active if PID Units Setup Page is set to SI and Proportional Band is not set to 0 Active if PID Units Setup Page is set to U S and Proportional Band is not set to 0 Se amp Active if PID Units Setup Page n 2 is set to SI and Proportional Derivative x A or B 0 00 to 9 99 minutes 0 00 mi
22. Alternating Display IN1 Display Time IN2 Display Time IN3 Display Time Static Message Message 1 to 4 5 6 Setup Watlow Series F4S D Setup Page Parameter Table Modbus Register Range read write Conditions for Parameter Description Modbus Value Default I O Set Ch Parameters to Appear System Main gt Setup gt System Guarantee Soak Band Decimal choice 1 Band Active Always 1 x 1 or 2 dependent Tr H Active if controller is Dual Chan Select value above 1 to 30000 or e nel 2 d bel qeu 1 to 3000 0 or r w ane DE OW SET par 01 to 300 0 or to define the soak 001 to 30 0 band 1 to 30000 Current Time hh mm ss current time Time Active Always 00 00 00 to 23 59 59 1916 hh zd ids p hh 0 to 23 1917 mm 24 hour cloc mm 0 to 59 1918 ss ss 0 to 59 rw Current Date M D Y current date Time Active Always 01 01 1998 to 1919 mm Enter actual date 12 31 2035 1920 dd mm 1 to 12 1921 yy dd 1 to 31 r w yy 1998 to 2035 PID Units U S Reset Rate 0 U S Reset 900 r w Active Always Choose units for PID S Integral Derivative Rate 0 control 1 F or C F 0 F 0 901 r w Active Always Choose temperature C 1 scale Show F or C No Upper Display 0 Yes Upper 1923 r w Active Always Choose whether to Yes Upper Display 1 Display 1 display or hide C or F in top display Channel x Autotune Set 50 to 150 50 to 150 90 90 Point Active Always 1
23. Code NEC standard wiring practices to install and operate the Series F4 Failure to do so could result in such damage and or injury or death A CAUTION Maintain isolation between analog inputs 2 and 3 and between analog input 1 and digital inputs 1 to 4 to prevent a ground loop A ground loop may cause incorrect readings Failure to follow this guideline could result in damage to equipment and product Digital Inputs x 1 to 4 Figure 12 6 Digital Inputs x 1 to 4 Voltage input 0 to 2V dc Event Input Low State 3 to 36V dc Event Input High State Contact closure 0 to 2kQ E vent Input Low State gt 23kQ Event Input High State Voltage Input Digital Input Common 27 Digital Input 1 28 te Digital Input Common 27 add a pull up input Contact Closure 10kQ resistor for each active Digital Input Common 27 7 Digital nput 1 28 Ze le 0S 62 82 Ze 92 SZ ve ES cole OZ 6L 8L ZL 5V dc 32 Digital Input 1 28 j Digital Input 2 29 Digital Input 3 30 i Digital Input 4 31 e i 5V de 32 e LAA Ak 5V7 do Internal Circuitry Ze Le OE 6c 82 Ze 92 SZ vo ES CO le OC 6L 8L ZL dooo0ooo00000000 goog Hg amp BH 2080 oooo0000 12 6 Wiring Watlow Series FAS D NOTE Switching inductive loads relay coils solenoids etc with the mechanical relay switch
24. Control Output 2B Process Control Output 2B High Power Limit Control Output 2B Low Power Limit Control Output 2B Analog Range Retransmit Output 1 Analog Range Retransmit Output 2 PID Units System F or C System Input 1 Fail Power System Open Loop Channel 1 Input 2 Fail Power System Open Loop Channel 2 Function Digital Input 1 Condition Digital Input 1 Function Digital Input 2 Condition Digital Input 2 Function Digital Input 3 Condition Digital Input 3 Function Digital Input 4 Condition Digital Input 4 mm rPrerrrrrv Watlow Series F4S D Communications 7 13 1075 Digital Input 1 Start Profile 1925 Cascade Type 2564 Rate 2B PID Set 7 Channel 2 1076 Digital Input 1 Start Step 1926 Cascade Range Low 2565 Dead Band 2B PID Set 7 Channel 2 1077 Digital Input 2 Start Profile 1927 Cascade Range High 2567 Hysteresis 2B PID Set 7 Channel 2 1078 Digital Input 2 Start Step 2000 Digital Output 1 Condition 2570 Proportional Band 2B PID Set 8 Channel 2 1079 Digital Input 3 Start Profile 2001 Function Digital Output 1 2571 Integral 2B PID Set 8 Channel 2 1080 Digital Input 3 Start Step 2010 Digital Output 2 Condition 2572 Reset 2B PID Set 8 Channel 2 1081 Digital Input 4 Start Profile 2011 Function Digital Output 2 2573 Derivative 2B PID Set 8 Channel 2 1082 Digital Input 4 Start Step 2020 Digital Output 3 Condition 2574 Rate 2B PID Set 8 Channel 2 1205 Gu
25. Displays the output SSR 2 2A type Process 4 None 0 Out2B DC 3 Displays the output SSR 2 2B type Process 4 None 0 Y NOTE Press the Information Key for more task related tips Modbus Register read write I O Set Ch lr 2r 10r leor 17r 18r 19r Conditions for Parameters to Appear Active Always Active Always Active Always Active Always Active Always Active Always Active Always Active Always Active Always Active Always Active Always Active Always 10 2 Diagnostics Watlow Series F4S D Diagnostic Menu Parameter Table Factory Page Parameter Description Retrans1 Displays the retrans mit 1 option Retrans2 Displays the retrans mit 2 option In1 AtoD Factory use only In2 AtoD Factory use only In3 AtoD Factory use only CJC1 AtoD Factory use only CJC2 AtoD Factory use only CJC1 Temp Cold junction com pensation for analog input 1 Reads the ambient temperature of the controller CJC2 Temp Cold junction com pensation for analog input 2 Reads the ambient temperature of the controller Line Freq Display the ac line frequency in hertz Range Modbus Value Default Process 4 None 0 Process 4 None 0 HHHH HHHH HHHH HHHH HHHH XX X Xxx XX X XXX XX xx Y NOTE For more information about how parameter settings affect the controller s operation see the Features
26. Enter 4 000mA from the current source to the controller Allow at least 10 seconds to stabilize Press the Right Key onceat the Calibrate Input 1 prompt At the 4 000mA prompt press once and to store 4 000mA press the Up Key once 4 Enter 20 000mA from the current source to the controller Allow at least 10 seconds to stabilize Press once at the Calibrate Input 1 prompt At the 20 000mA prompt press once and to store 20 000mA press once Input 2 5 Connect the current source to terminals 54 and 58 6 Enter 4 00mA from the current source to the controller Allow at least 10 seconds to stabilize Press once at the Calibrate Input 2 prompt At the 4 000mA prompt press once and to store 4 000mA press once 7 Enter 20 00mA from the current source to the controller Allow at least 10 seconds to stabilize Press once at the Calibrate Input 2 prompt At the 20 000mA prompt press once and to store 20 000mA press once Input 3 8 Connect the voltage source to terminals 52 and 56 of the controller 9 Enter 4 000mA from the current source to the controller Allow at least 10 seconds to stabilize Watlow Series FAS D Calibration 9 3 Press once at the Calibrate Input 3 prompt At the 4 000mA prompt press once and to store the 4 000mA input press once 10 Enter 20 000mA from the current source to the controller Allow at least 10 seconds to stabilize Press
27. Hysteresis x A or B 6 4 Proportional Band x A or B 6 4 Open Loop Channel x enable 5 7 Open Loop Detect 6 2 operations overview 3 1 profile control 3 2 sample application 3 7 Operations Page map 3 10 Parameter Record 3 15 parameter table 3 11 operator s display see lower display ordering information A 7 Output Calibration 9 4 9 6 output condition indicators 2 2 Outputs Event number of 1 1 outputs x 1A 1B 2A and 2B type 10 2 wiring 12 7 12 8 P P Parameter x Custom Main Page 5 15 page and menu maps all A 16 A 17 Calibration Menu 9 6 Communications Menu 5 14 7 16 Diagnostics Menu 10 1 Operations Page 3 10 Profiles Page 4 11 Set Lockout Menu 8 2 Setup Page 5 6 pages software 2 1 A 16 A 17 Panel Lock 5 5 parameter record Custom Main Page 5 3 A 10 Appendix Watlow Series F4S D Operations Page 3 15 Profile 4 7 Setup Page 5 16 parameter setup order 5 1 5 2 parameter tables Calibration Menu 9 7 9 8 Communications Menu 5 14 7 16 Diagnostic Menu 10 2 10 3 Main Page 2 8 Operations Page 3 11 3 14 Profiles Page 4 12 4 16 Set Lockout Menu 8 3 Setup Page 5 7 5 15 Test Menu 10 4 password lock 8 1 password setting or changing 8 2 pattern see profile pause Hold profile 4 3 Percent Power Output status 7 2 PI control 6 5 droop 6 5 Integral 6 5 overshoot 6 5 reset 6 5 PID block see PID set PID control 6 5 autotuning 6 8 derivative 6 5 PID parameters adjusting manually 3 5 PID set
28. Output 1A C Open collector switched dc F Process 0 to 5 1 to 5 0 to 10V dc 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA K Solid state Form A 0 5 amp relay Output 1B A None C Open collector switched dc F Process 0 to 5 1 to 5 0 to 10V dc 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA K Solid state Form A 0 5 amp relay Auxiliary Input Module 0 None 6 Dual universal inputs Auxiliary Retransmit Module 0 None 1 Single retransmit output 0 to 5 1 to 5 0 to 10V dc 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA 2 Dual retransmit outputs 0 to 5 1 to 5 0 to 10V dc 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA Language and RTD Options 1 English with 100 RTD 2 German with 100 O RTD 3 French with 100 O RTD 4 Spanish with 100 Q RTD 5 English with 500 and 1 kQ RTD 6 German with 500 and 1 kQ RTD 7 French with 500 and 1 kQ RTD 8 Spanish with 500 and 1 kQ RTD Display and Custom Options RG Standard Display Red Green display only XX Custom options software setting parameters overlay T TET o9 Ordering Information 1 4 DIN Dual Channel Ramping Controller Series F4 DIN Dual Channel Ramping Controller F4 D_ Dual Channel Ramping Controller 3 universal analog inputs 4 digital inputs 8 digital outputs 2 alarms EIA 232 485 comms Power Supply H 100 to 240V ac dc L 24 to 28Vx ac dc Output 1A C Open collector switched dc F Process 0 to 5 1 to 5 0 to 10V dc 0 to 20 mA 4
29. PTII D W3 B R S RTD e 2 or 3 wire platinum 100 Q JIS or DIN curves 1 0 or 0 1 indication Process Input resolution 50 000 bits at full scale e Range selectable 0 to 10V dc 0 to 5V dc 1 to 5V dc 0 to 50mV O to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA Voltage input impedance 20 kQ e Current input impedance 100 Q Digital Inputs 4 Update rate 10 Hz Contact or dc voltage 36 V dc maximum e 10 KQ input impedance Control Outputs 1A 1B 2A 2B Update rate 20 Hz Open Collector Switched DC Internal load switching nominal Switched dc 22 to 28V dc limited 9 30 mA External load switching maximum Open collector 42V dc 9 0 5 A Solid state Relay Zero switched optically coupled 0 5 A 24V ac minimum 253V ac maximum Process Outputs Optional Retransmit Update rate 1 Hz User selectable 0 to 10V dc 0 to 5V dc 1 to 5V dc 81 kQ min 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA 800 max Resolution dc ranges 2 5mV nominal mA ranges 5 pA nominal Calibration accuracy dc ranges x15 mV mA ranges 30 pA Temperature stability 100ppm C Alarm Outputs Output update rate1 Hz Electromechanical relay Form C 2A 30V dc or 240V ac maximum Digital Outputs 8 Update rate 10 Hz Open collector output e Off 42V dc max 10 pA e On 0 2V dc max 50 mA sink Internal supply 5V dc 80 mA Communications EIA 232 and EIA 485 serial communications with Modbus RTU pr
30. Point Low Limit and Set Point High Limit parame ters Setup Page gt Analog I nputx Setting the set point to Set Point Low Limit minus 1 1 will turn control Output 1 off and display the set point as off Static Set Pointl OFF AV Adjusts Value lt Back gt Next Watlow Series F4S D Operations 3 1 Profile Control The main purpose of the Series F4 is to control pro files for ramp and soak processing applications The instructions below explain how to use an exist ing profile To program a profile see Chapter 4 Profile Programming To Start Run a Profile To initiate the profile mode press the Profile K ey and answer the questions that follow While running a profile the Profile Status message on the lower display will keep you informed about the progress of the profile For example it could read like the screen at right v NOTE As a protective measure all stored profiles will be cleared if you enter the Setup Page and change values in the Analog Input 1 2 3 menus specifically the Sensor Sensor Type Decimal Scale for process inputs and Set Point High and Low Limits Pop up messages will warn that the profiles will be erased from the controller s mem ory v NOTE You must configure the software for your inputs and out puts before programming a profile See the Setup Chap ter v NOTE You must program a profile or use the pre programmed MILSTD810D profile before running it Se
31. Process Display Menu and choose Alternating Under Set Display Time choose a duration for the display of the Input 1 and Input 3 variables N Cascade Autotuning Procedure 1 Go to Setup Page Custom Main Page Menu Choose Tune Status 1 and Tune Status 2 to ap pear as 2 of the 16 parameters that can be dis played on the Main Page The Main Page will now display the status of the autotuning process 2 Autotune the inner loop Go to the Autotune PI D Menu Operations Page and select Cascade In ner loop Choose Cascade Inner Loop PID Set 1 to 5 where PID values will be stored after autotun ing Autotuning begins when you choose the PID set While autotuning the F4 controller will con trol the energy source in an on off mode to a tem perature equal to the Cascade High Range setting x Channel 1 Autotune Set Point For best results use proportional control only on the inner loop 3 Next autotune the outer loop Go to the Auto tune PID Menu Operations Page Choose Cascade Outer Loop then choose Outer Loop PID set 1 to 5 where PID values will be stored after autotuning Autotuning begins when you choose the PID set While autotuning the outer loop will be controlled in an on off mode at a set point equal to static set point x Ch 1 Autotune Set Point In most cases the autotuning feature will tune for acceptable control If not manually tune the outer loop step 4 below Before manually tuning record the values gener
32. Setup Page Factory Page After choosing the item to lock out press and choose the level of access Full Read Only Password or Hidden If you choose Password you must set the password see below v NOTE Full Access is the default for all menus Unless you change the level of access operators will be able to read and change every setting in every menu in the Series F4 software v NOTE For more information about how parameter settings affect the controller s operation see the Features Chapter Password operators can enter and change settings after entering a password and Hidden operators cannot see the menu or page it is not displayed Set Point settings cannot be Hidden Full Access is the default for all menus Unless you change the level of access operators will be able to read and change every setting in every menu in the Series F4 software Main Factory gt Set Lockout Diagnostic Test Factory Set Lock _ Co Set Point gt Oper Autotune PID M Oper Edit PID v Lock Autotune PID_ Full Access Read Only gt Password Watlow Series F4S D Security and Locks 8 1 Enter a Password If you try to set password security before any password has been established a pop up message will give you the opportunity to enter one Use the 0 Q keystoenter a four character password which can consist of letters numbers or both After entering and confirming the passwor
33. expressed in thousandths volts Process Output 2B 20 000mA Calibrate 0000 to 24000 expressed in microamps Process Output 2B 4 000mA Calibrate 0000 to 6000 expressed in microamps Process Units Analog Input 0 Temperature 1 rh 2 psi 3 units Process Units Analog Input 2 0 Temperature 1 rh 2 psi 3 units Process Units Analog Input 3 0 Temperature 1 rh 2 psi 3 units Process Control Output 1A 0 4to20mA 1 0to20mA 2 Oto 10V 3 Oto 5V 4 1to5V Process Control Output 1B 0 4to20mA 1 0to20mA 2 0to10V 3 Oto 5V 4 1to5V Process Control Output 2A 0 4to20mA 1 Oto 20mA 2 0to10V 3 Oto 5V 4 1to5V Process Control Output 2B 0 4to20mA 1 0to20mA 2 O0to10V 3 Oto 5V 4 1to5V Profiles Lockout 0 Full Access 1 Read Only 2 Password 3 Hidden Proportional Band 1A Cascade PID Set 1 Channel 1 0 to 30000 Proportional Band 1A Cascade PID Set 2 Channel 1 0 to 30000 Proportional Band 1A Cascade PID Set 3 Channel 1 0 to 30000 Proportional Band 1A Cascade PID Set 4 Channel 1 0 to 30000 Proportional Band 1A Cascade PID Set 5 Channel 1 0 to 30000 Proportional Band 1A PID Set 1 Channel 1 0 to 30000 Proportional Band 1A PID Set 2 Channel 1 0 to 30000 Proportional Band 1A PID Set 3 Channel 1 0 to 30000 Proportional Band 1A PID Set 4 Channel 1 0 to 30000 540 rw 2650 r w 2660 r w 2670 r w 2680 r w 2690 r w 550 r w 560 r w 570 r w 580 r w 590 r w 2500 r w 2510
34. or change a letter in a user terminate a profile nameable field such as alarms N o Q events and profile names A Left and Right Keys Back Out and Next Move right to select the choice to 4 20mA 0 20mA the right of the cursor and proceed Information Key 0 10V to the next screen Move left to exit Toggle for more 0 5V information 1 5V Provides information in the 0 50mV Lower Display about the Choose Units cursor selected parameter Another press toggles the Temperatu display back to the parameter rh PSI units Choose Decimal 0 0 0 0 00 0 000 Figure 2 4 Series F4 Keys and Navigation 2 4 Keys Displays and Navigation Watlow Series F4S D Guided Setup In most F4 menus setup and programming tasks are guided For example once you select Analog Input 1 on the Setup Page all parameters neces sary to configure that input are linked 1 Use tomovethe cursor to select an item in a list Press the Right Key Enter the value and make a choice Press again Repeat until you return to the original list uF WN saves the value and proceeds to the next parameter in the series saves the value and backs out of the series and returns to the Main Page For initial setup and programming we recommend that you answer all the questions in the series entering values for all linked parameters and pressing amp until you return to your starting point To edit a parameter
35. to 17 C and watch the approach to the new set point If you increase Derivative Rate too much the ap proach to the set point will be very sluggish Re peat as necessary until the system rises to the new set point without overshooting or approach ing the set point too slowly For additional information about manual tuning and proportional integral and derivative control see the F eatures Chapter Multiple PID Sets Environmental chambers ovens and furnaces typi cally have different thermal requirements when they operate at high and low temperatures or pres sures To accommodate varying thermal require ments the F 4 is capable of storing five different PID sets for each channel One set for each channel can be chosen in each profile step For example a controller in an environmental chamber with PID settings optimized for control at subzero temperatures may not control well when the set point is set to temperatures above the boil ing point of water With the F4 one PID set could be used for subzero operation and another set for temperatures above boiling Multiple Tuning Procedure 1 To auto tune a single PID set begin by setting the static set point on the Main Page 2 Go to the Autotune PID Menu Operations Page and choose a channel and a set Autotuning be gins when you select the set The Main Page dis plays information about the autotuning process when Tune Status is selected in the Custom Main Page
36. trolling heat and humidity For the fastest possible switching rate tighter control and longer heater life he se lected Burst Fire control for each of them designating 1A and 1B as heat cool outputs and 2A and 2B as humidify de humidify outputs Digital output 7 was wired to an SSR solid state relay that switch ed a solenoid valve controlling the flow of liquid nitrogen used for cooling Name Default Function Boost cool Boost Power Level 9096 Boost Delay 20 seconds 5 4 Setup Watlow Series F4S D Analog Input 2 The humidity sensor on analog input 2 was a process sensor using a 4 to 20 mA signal so Andy set the high end of the scale 20mA for 100 and the low 4mA for 0 relative humidity rh Knowing that process sensor displays are sometimes jumpy he put a 1 second filter on it to stabilize it Sensor Process Type Vaisala Units RH Scale Low 0 Scale High 100 Alarms He assigned an alarm output to indicate a temperature de viation on input 1 which would monitor chamber tem perature and gave it a name that would state the problem Name TEMP DEV Type Deviation Source Input 1 Latch Yes Silencing Self clear Alarm Hysteresis 1 1 0 Sides Both Condition Close on alarm Show Yes Digital Output 8 Andy set the compressor control parameter to have the compressor run only when cooling is needed on Power 0 off Power 9 Off Delay 30 seconds On Delay 6
37. 000V Yes 9 Input Active Always 1603 1 Store 10 000V cali 1608 2 bration for the pro 1613 3 cess input w The tenth character of your model number determines F4 __ _ 5 to 8 RG 240 00 and 6080 00Q what prompts appear and what input resistance values to v NOTE use for the RTD calibration For more information about how parameter settings affect F4__ ____ _ 4to4 RG 15 00 and 380 000 the controller s operation see Features Chapter Watlow Series FAS D Calibration 9 7 Factory Page Parameter Table Modbus Register Range read write Conditions for Parameter Description Modbus Value Default U O Set Ch Parameters to Appear Calibrate Input x 1 to 3 Main Page gt Factory gt Calibration gt Calibrate Input x 1 to 3 4 000mA Yes 10 Input Active Always 1608 1 Store 4mA calibra 1608 2 tion for the process 1613 3 input ii 20 000mA Yes 11 jn E Active Always Store 20mA calibra 1608 2 tion for the process 1613 3 input w Calibrate Output x 1A 1B 2A 2B and Retransmit x 1 and 2 Main gt Factory gt Calibration Calibrate Output x 1A 1B 2A 2B and Retransmit x 1 and 2 4 000mA 0 000mA to 6 000mA 4 000mA Mon Active Always 1604 Store 4mA calibra 0 to 6000 4000 1609 1B tion for the process 1614 2A 1619 2B output Rexmit 1624 1 1629 2 w 20 000mA 0 000 to 24 000mA 20 000mA Output Active Always 1605 1A Store 20mA calibra 0 to 24000 20000 1610 1
38. 14 Digital Out 6 15 Digital Out 7 16 Digital Out 8 17 All On 18 Communications 901 F or C System r w 0 F 1 C z9z9 N w about parameters see the TWO no KO CO O C1 4 C5 n9 C E ce Profile Parameters 4004 Autostart Profile Date or Day r w 0 Date 1 Day 4009 Autostart Time hours riw 0 to 99 4010 Autostart Time minutes r w 0 to 59 4011 Autostart Time seconds r w 0 to 59 7 10 Communications Watlow Series F4S D 4006 rw 4005 r w 4007 rw 4008 r w 4046 rw 4124 4047 r w 4125 4111 4112 4113 4114 4115 4116 4117 4118 4002 4060 rw 4061 rw 4062 rw 4129 4130 Autostart Date day 1 to 31 Autostart Date month 0 to 12 Autostart Date year 1998 to 2035 Autostart Day of week Every Day Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday NOohwWNM O Channel 1 PID Set Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps 0 Channel 1 P 1 Channel 2 P Channel 1 PID Ramp Rate Ramp Time or Soak Step Current Profile Status 0 Channel 1 PID 1 Channel 2 PID Channel 2 PID Set Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps 0 Channel 1 PID 1 Channel 2 PID Channel 2 PID Set Ramp Rate Ramp Time or Soak Step Current Profile Status 0 Channel 1 PID 1 Channel 2 PID Create Profile see Edit Profile Action Delete Profile or Step see Edit Profile Action Digital Output 1 Monitor Current Status Profile 0 Off 1 On Digita
39. 1606 1607 1605 1604 1611 w 1612 1610 Name Digital Output 3 10 characters ASCII equivalent decimal code see Modbus Naming Flowchart Name Digital Output 4 10 characters ASCII equivalent decimal code see Modbus Naming Flowchart Name Digital Output 5 10 characters ASCII equivalent decimal code see Modbus Naming Flowchart Name Digital Output 6 10 characters ASCII equivalent decimal code see Modbus Naming Flowchart Name Digital Output 7 10 characters ASCII equivalent decimal code see Modbus Naming Flowchart Name Digital Output 8 10 characters ASCII equivalent decimal code see Modbus Naming Flowchart Open Loop Channel 1 0 Off U v NOTE Open Loop Channel 2 s 9 on For more information n about parameters see the Index Operation Mode Status 0 Terminate Profile 1 Pre run Profile 2 Running Profile 3 Holding Profile Output 1A Type Diagnostics 1 DC 2 SSR 3 Process Output 1B Type Diagnostics 0 None 1 DC 2 SSR 3 Process Output 2A Type Diagnostics None 1 DC 2 SSR 3 Process Output 2B Type Diagnostics None 1 DC 2 SSR 3 Process PID Units System 0 US Reset Rate 1 SI Integral Derivative Power Out Action 0 Continue 1 Hold 2 Terminate 3 Reset 4 Idle Set Point 1 5 Idle Set Point 2 Power Out Time 0 to 9999 seconds Process Display 0 Input 1 only 1 Alternating Process Display Input 1 Time 0 to 999 Process Display Input 2 Time 0 to 99
40. 2 Alarm set points are established in the Operations Page The alarm state begins when the temperature A reaches the alarm high set point Alarm High Set Point V Alarm Hysteresis Normal Operating Range The alarm state continues until the temperature drops to the alarm high set point minus the hysteresis A latching alarm could be turned off by A the operator at this point A non ee Low latching alarm would turn off Set Point Temperature Process Temperature automatically Time Figure 6 9a Alarm Latching Alarm High Set Point Hysteresis Process Temperature Alarm is enabled here Normal Operating Range Temperature Hysteresis S Alarm Low Set Point Startup Alarm is triggered here alarm is JT disabled Time Figure 6 9b Alarm Silencing Watlow Series FAS D Features 6 9 Advanced Features Boost Heat and Boost Cool The boost heat feature uses a digital output to turn on an additional heater to speed up the heating As the process temperature approaches the set point the boost heat output switches off so that the pro cess temperature doesn t overshoot the set point Boost cool uses a digital output to speed up the cooling process typically by activating a solenoid valve that releases liquid nitrogen For either boost heat or boost cool set Boost 96 Pow er to define the power level that must be exceeded before the b
41. 2 Channel 1 Proportional Band 1B PID Set 3 Channel 1 Integral 1B PID Set 3 Channel 1 Reset 1B PID Set 3 Channel 1 Derivative 1B PID Set 3 Channel 1 Rate 1B PID Set 3 Channel 1 Dead Band 1B PID Set 3 Channel 1 Hysteresis 1B PID Set 3 Channel 1 Proportional Band 1B PID Set 4 Channel 1 Integral 1B PID Set 4 Channel 1 Reset 1B PID Set 4 Channel 1 Derivative 1B PID Set 4 Channel 1 Rate 1B PID Set 4 Channel 1 Dead Band 1B PID Set 4 Channel 1 Hysteresis 1B PID Set 4 Channel 1 Proportional Band 1B PID Set 5 Channel 1 Integral 1B PID Set 5 Channel 1 Reset 1B PID Set 5 Channel 1 Derivative 1B PID Set 5 Channel 1 Rate 1B PID Set 5 Channel 1 Dead Band 1B PID Set 5 Channel 1 Hysteresis 1B PID Set 5 Channel 1 Sensor Analog Input 1 Sensor Type Analog Input 1 Set Point Low Limit Analog Input 1 Set Point High Limit Analog Input 1 Filter Time Analog Input 1 Calibration Offset Analog Input 1 Decimal Point Analog Input 1 Error Latching Analog Input 1 Process Units Analog Input 1 Sensor Analog Input 2 Sensor Type Analog Input 2 Set Point Low Limit Analog Input 2 Set Point High Limit Analog Input 2 Filter Time Analog Input 2 Calibration Offset Analog Input 2 Decimal Point Analog Input 2 Error Latching Analog Input 2 Process Units Analog Input 2 Sensor Analog Input 3 Sensor Type Analog Input 3 Set Point Low Limit Analog Input 3 Set Point High Limit Analog Input
42. 2 4 A 17 Up and Down Keys 2 4 A 17 keys displays and navigation overview 2 1 A 17 L Latching Alarm Output x 5 12 Line Frequency 10 3 linearization table 5 8 lockout 8 1 8 3 locks 8 3 Clear Locks 8 3 levels 8 1 Set Lock 8 3 Low Power Limit 5 11 Low Scale 5 12 6 3 Lower Display 2 2 M Main Page 2 3 2 8 Alarm x Condition 2 8 Autotuning Channel x 2 8 Custom Main Page 2 3 5 2 5 3 default Main Page 2 3 error messages on 2 3 parameter table 2 8 manual operation not allowed 3 1 manual tuning 3 5 3 6 Manufacture Date 10 2 map software A 16 A 17 menu and page maps all A 16 A 17 Calibration Menu 9 6 Communications Menu 5 14 7 16 Diagnostics Menu 10 1 Operations Page 3 10 Profiles Page 4 11 Set Lockout Menu 8 2 Setup Page 5 6 Message 1 to 4 Static Message 5 15 Military Standard Test 810D 3 7 4 8 4 9 Modbus registers alphabetical listing 7 2 7 10 numerical listing 7 13 7 15 profile parameters 7 10 7 12 Modbus Remote Terminal Unit RTU 7 1 Modbus RTU protocol 7 1 Model Number 12 1 A 7 Model Diagnostic 10 2 multiple PID sets 3 5 6 6 multiple tuning procedure 3 5 N Name Alarm Output x 5 12 Digital Input x 5 10 Digital Output x 5 13 names how to enter 2 6 naming alarm output 2 6 5 13 digital input 2 6 5 10 digital output 2 6 5 12 profiles 2 6 4 4 navigation 2 4 navigation keys 2 4 noise filter 6 2 non volatile memory 4 2 numbers how to enter 2 6 O On Off control 6 4 chattering 6 4
43. 232 Communications 12 10a Termination for EIA 232 to 485 Converter 12 10b EIA TIA 232 Connections 5 12 10c EIA 232 to EIA 485 Conversion 12 11a GPIB Conversion to EIA 232 or EIA 485 12 11b System Wiring Example lusus 12 12 Watlow Series FAS F Appendix A 13 A 14 Appendix Watlow Series F4S D Watlow Series F4S D Appendix A 15 series F4 Software Map For ranges defaults Modbus numbers and other in formation about the parameters refer to the Parameter Tables in the chapters noted below Main Page see Chapter 2 Input x 1 to 3 Error Alarm x 1 to 2 Condition Autotuning Ch x 1 to 2 Parameter x 1 to 16 Current File Current Step Input 2 Value Set Point 1 Set Point 2 Step Type Target SP1 Target SP2 Wait for Status Time Remaining Digital Ins Digital Outs Power 1 Power 2 Date Time Go to Operations Go to Profiles Go to Setup Go to Factory Operations Page see Chapter 3 Autotune PID Channel 1 Autotune Tune Off PID Set x 1 to 5 Channel 2 Autotune Tune Off PID Set x 6 to 10 Edit PID PID Set Channel 1 PID Set x 1 to 5 PID Set Channel 2 PID Set x 6 to 10 Proportional BandA Integral A ResetA Derivative A RateA Dead Band A Hysteresis A Proportional Band B Integral B ResetB Derivative B RateB Dead Band B Hysteresis B Alarm Set Points Alarmi Alarml Lo Deviation Alarml Hi Deviation Alarm2 Low SP A
44. 3 Filter Time Analog Input 3 Calibration Offset Analog Input 3 Decimal Point Analog Input 3 Error Latching Analog Input 3 Process Units Analog Input 3 Scale Low Analog Input 1 Scale High Analog Input 1 Scale Low Analog Input 2 Scale High Analog Input 2 Scale Low Analog Input 3 Scale High Analog Input 3 Function Control Output 1A Process Control Output 1A Alarm Type Alarm Output 1 Alarm Hysteresis Alarm Output 1 Alarm Latching Alarm Output 1 Alarm Silencing Alarm Output 1 Alarm Sides Alarm Output 1 Alarm Logic Alarm Output 1 Alarm Messages Alarm Output 1 Retransmit Source Retransmit Output 1 Low Scale Retransmit Output 1 High Scale Retransmit Output 1 Scale Offset Retransmit Output 1 High Power Limit Control Output 1A Low Power Limit Control Output 1A arm Source Alarm Output 1 unction Control Output 1B rocess Control Output 1B arm Type Alarm Output 2 arm Hysteresis Alarm Output 2 arm Latching Alarm Output 2 arm Silencing Alarm Output 2 arm Sides Alarm Output 2 arm Logic Alarm Output 2 arm Messages Alarm Output 2 Retransmit Source Retransmit Output 2 Low Scale Retransmit Output 2 High Scale Retransmit Output 2 Scale Offset Retransmit Output 2 High Power Limit Control Output 1B Low Power Limit Control Output 1B Alarm Source Alarm Output 2 Function Control Output 2A Process Control Output 2A High Power Limit Control Output 2A Low Power Limit Control Output 2A Function
45. 30000 0 Low 2515 Dead Band 2A PID Set 7 Channel 2 1 High r w 1 to 30000 1061 Digital Input 1 Condition 2525 Dead Band 2A PID Set 8 Channel 2 r w Low r w 1 to 30000 1 High 2535 Dead Band 2A PID Set 9 Channel 2 1060 Digital Input 1 Function r w 1 to 30000 r w 0 Off 2545 Dead Band 2A PID Set 10 Channel 2 1 Panel Lock r w 1 to 30000 2 Reset Alarm 2555 Dead Band 2B PID Set 6 Channel 2 3 Control Outputs Off rw 1 to 30000 4 All Outputs Off 2565 Dead Band 2B PID Set 7 Channel 2 Fee DM 1 to 30000 7 Pause Profile 2575 Dead Band 2B PID Set 8 Channel 2 8 Resume Profile rw 1 to 30000 9 Terminate Profile 2585 Dead Band 2B PID Set 9 Channel 2 10 Wait For Event rw 1 to 30000 1075 Digital Input 1 Start Profile 2595 Dead Band 2B PID Set 10 Channel 2 rw 1to 40 rw 1 to 30000 PRR 2603 Derivative 1A Cascade PID Set 1 Channel 1 MAS CRINALE i Stat Sien r w 000 to 999 expressed in hundredths of minutes 213 Digital Input 2 Status 2613 Derivative 1A Cascade PID Set 2 Channel 1 Te rw 000 to 999 expressed in hundredths of minutes 1 High 2623 Derivative 1A Cascade PID Set 3 Channel 1 T rw 000 to 999 expressed in hundredths of minutes boss Digital aput 2 condition 2633 Derivative 1A Cascade PID Set 4 Channel 1 1 High r w 000 to 999 expressed in hundredths of minutes 1062 Digital Input 2 Functi 2643 Derivative 1A Cascade PID Set 5 Channel 1 gia pute SURCHOR i T rw 0 Off r w 000 to 999 expressed in hundredths of minutes 4 Panel
46. Active Always Select a PID set for PID 5e 2 1 qaar channel 1 PID Set 3 2 PID Set 4 3 PID Set 5 4 Channel 2 PID Set 6 0 PID Set 6 0 4047 r w Active if controller is Dual Channel Select a PID set for PID 5 amp 7 0 aa channel 2 PID Set 8 2 PID Set 9 3 PID Set 10 4 Jump Main gt Profiles gt Edit Profile gt Profile x 1 to 40 gt Edit Step gt Step x 1 to 256 gt Jump Step Jump To Profile 1to40 or name 4050 r w Select name or num 1 to 40 ber of profile to jump to Step x 1 to 256 1 to 256 1 1 4051 r w Active Always Select number of 1 to 256 steps to jump to Number of Repeats 1to 999 1 1 4052 r w Active Always Set number of times 1 to 999 to repeat the chosen J ump End Main gt Profiles gt Edit Profile gt Profile x 1 to 40 gt Edit Step gt Step x 1 to 256 gt End Action Hold 0 All Off 2 4060 r w Active Always Select what state Control Off 1 the controller will be All Off 2 in at the end ofthe Idle 3 profile NOTE If a power out condition occurs during a profile and more than 20 jump steps are stored in the F4 s Profile Program memory the controller will terminate the profile and turn off all outputs if Continue Hold or Terminate was selected as the Power Out action If Profile Reset or Go to Idle Set Point was selected the controller will take those actions A pop up message will warn of this when the 21st jump step is programmed Y NOTE Two set
47. Alarm Output 1 rw 0 Tune Off rw 0 No 1 PID Set 1 1 Yes 2 PIDSet2 3 PID Set 3 4 PID Set 4 5 PID Set 5 7 2 Communications Watlow Series F4S D 1306 Autotune PID Lockout rw 0 Full Access 1 Read Only 2 Password 3 Hidden 304 Autotune Set Point Channel 1 Value r w 50 to 150 expressed in 323 Autotune Set Point Channel 2 Value r w 50 to 150 expressed in 2062 Boost Cool Power Digital Output 7 r w 100 to 0 for Cool expressed in 2064 Boost Cool Delay On Time Digital Output 7 rw 0 to 9999 seconds 2062 Boost Cool Power rw Value 2064 Boost Cool Time rw Value 2052 Boost Heat Power Digital Output 6 r w 0 to 0 for Heat expressed in 96 2054 Boost Heat Delay On Time Digital Output 6 rw 0 to 9999 seconds 2052 Boost Heat Power rw Value in 2054 Boost Heat Time rw Value in seconds 605 Calibration Offset Analog Input 1 rw 19999 to 30000 615 Calibration Offset Analog Input 2 rw 19999 to 30000 625 Calibration Offset Analog Input 3 rw 19999 to 30000 1922 Cascade Inner Set Point r 1925 Cascade Type r w 0 No Cascade 1 Process Cascade 2 Deviation Cascade 1926 Cascade Range Low rw Depends on Sensor 1927 Cascade Range High rw Depends on Sensor 1330 33 Change Password rw ASCII codes 0 9 A Z 1501 CJC1 AtoD Diagnostics r HHHH see In 1 AD 1500 CJC1 Temp Diagnostics r value 1532 CJC2 AtoD Diagnostics ij HHHH 1531 CJC2 Temp Diagnostics r value 312 Clear Alarm 1 Key Press Simulation w w
48. Calibrate Rexmit 2 Restore Inl Cal Restore In2 Cal Restore In3 Cal Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Output 1A Output 1B Output 2A Output 2B 1 2 and 3 see the Wiring Chapter and the Appendix Milliamperes 2 w Connect the volt ammeter to terminals 47 and 46 Press the Right Key at the Calibrate Rexmit 2 prompt At the 4 000mA prompt press once Usethe Up Key or the Down Key toadjust the display to the reading on the volt ammeter The controller should stabilize within one second Repeat until the volt amme ter reads 4 000mA Press to store the value Press the Right Key at the Calibrate Rexmit 2 prompt At the 20 000mA prompt press once UsetheUp Key or the Down Key toadjust the display to the reading on the volt ammeter The controller should stabi lize within one second Repeat until the volt ammeter reads 20 000mA Press to store the value Volts 5 o Connect the volt ammeter to terminals 45 and 46 Press the Right Key at the Calibrate Rexmit 2 prompt At the 1 000V prompt press once Usethe Up Key or the Down Key toadjust the display to the reading on the volt ammeter The controller should stabilize within one second Repeat until the volt amme ter reads 1 000V Press to store the value Press the Right Key at the Calibrate Rexmit 2 prompt At the 10 000V prompt press once UsetheUp Key or the Down Key 9 6 Calibration Watlo
49. Cascade PID Set 5 Channel 1 Integral 1B Cascade PID Set 5 Channel 1 Reset 1B Cascade PID Set 5 Channel 1 Derivative 1B Cascade PID Set 5 Channel 1 Rate 1B Cascade PID Set 5 Channel 1 Dead Band 1B Cascade PID Set 5 Channel 1 Hysteresis 1B Cascade PID Set 5 Channel 1 Name Digital Input 1 7 characters Name Digital Input 2 7 characters Name Digital Input 3 7 characters Name Digital Input 4 7 characters Name Digital Output 1 10 characters Name Digital Output 2 10 characters Name Digital Output 3 10 characters Name Digital Output 4 10 characters Name Digital Output 5 10 characters Name Digital Output 6 10 characters Name Digital Output 7 10 characters Name Digital Output 8 10 characters Name Alarm 1 10 characters Name Alarm 2 10 characters Name Profile 1 10 characters Name Profile 2 10 characters Name Profile 3 10 characters Name Profile 4 10 characters Name Profile 5 10 characters Name Profile 6 10 characters Name Profile 7 10 characters Name Profile 8 10 characters Name Profile 9 10 characters Name Profile 10 10 characters Name Profile 11 10 characters Name Profile 12 10 characters Name Profile 13 10 characters Name Profile 14 10 characters Name Profile 15 10 characters Name Profile 16 10 characters Name Profile 17 10 characters Name Profile 18 10 characters Name Profile 19 10 characters Name Profile 20 10 characters Na
50. Chapter Modbus Register read write I O Set Ch 20r 21r 1504 r 1505 r 1506 r 1501 r 1532 r 1500 r 1531r 1515r Conditions for Parameters to Appear Active Always Active Always Active Always Active Always Active Always Active Always Active Always Active Always Active Always Active Always Watlow Series F4S D Diagnostics 10 3 Diagnostic Menu Parameter Table Factory Page Parameter Description Main gt Factory gt Test Test Outputs Choose output to test Display Test Range Modbus Value Test All Off Output 1A Output 1B Output 2A Output 2B Retransmit 1 Retransmit 2 Alarm 1 Alarm 2 Digital Out 1 Digital Out 2 Digital Out 3 Digital Out 4 Digital Out 5 Digital Out 6 Digital Out 7 Digital Out 8 All On Communications 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Yes 1 Checks LED display segments by turning them on and off Full Defaults Default all values Causes all parame Yes 800 ters and profile val ues to revert to their factory default settings Default Y NOTE For more information about how parameter settings affect the controller s operation see the Features Chapter Modbus Register read write Conditions for UO Set Ch Parameters to Appear
51. Event Output Digital Outputs 1 to 8 o Active if digital outputs are con Off 0 4030 rjw 1 figured as events put on or off Digital On D 431 304 D outputs must be con 412 r 2 figured in the Setup 4032 r w 3 Page before they can je d ui be used here Verify 4114 r 4 that the setup 4034 r w 5 415 r 5 matches events 4035 r w 6 416 r 6 4036 r w 7 417 r 7 4037 r w 8 418 r 8 Y NOTE To edit profiles through serial communications see p 7 17 Y NOTE Two sets of Modbus registers contain profile information In edit mode the number of the profile being edited is at 4000 and the number of the step being edited is at 4001 When the profile is running the number of the profile being run is at 4100 and the number of the step being run is at 4101 All run addresses are read only 4 12 Profile Programming Watlow Series F4S D Profiles Page Parameter Table Parameter Description Time Set the timein hours minutes and seconds Rate Select the rate of change by entering degrees per minute Set Point Channel 1 Set the target for the Channel 1 process value temperature etc at the end of this step Set Point Channel 2 Set the target for the Channel 2 process value temperature etc at the end of this step PID Set Select the PID set for each channel Guarantee Soak Select this feature Range Modbus Value 00 00 01 to 99 59 59 h 0
52. F or 200 to 1370 C Type T 328 to 750 F or 200 to 400 C Type N 32 to 2372 or 0 to 1300 C Type E 328 to 1470 F or 200 to 800 C Type C 32 to 4200F or O to 2315 C Type D 32 to 4352 F or 0 to 2400 C Type PTIl 32 to 2543 F or O to 1395 C Type R 32 to 3200 F or O to 1760 C Type S 32 to 3200F or O to 1760 C Type B 32 to 3300F or O to 1816 C RTD DIN 328 to 1472 F or 200 to 800 C RTD JIS 328 to 1166 F or 200 to 800 C Process 19999 to 30000 units Sensor Accuracy Ranges Input ranges Type J 32 to 1382F or O to 750 C Type K 328 to 2282 F or 200 to 1250 C Type T 328 to 662 F or 200 to 350 C Type N 32 to 2282F or O to 1250 C Type E 328 to 1470 F or 200 to 800 C Type C W5 32 to 4200 or O to 2315 C Type D W3 32 to 4352F or 0 to 2400 C Type PTI 32 to 2540 F or 0 to 1393 C Type R 32 to 2642 or O to 1450 C Type S 32 to 2642 F or O to 1450 C Type B 1598 to 3092 F or 870 to 1700 C RTD DIN 328 to 1472 F or 200 to 800 C RTD JIS 328 to 1166 F or 200 to 630 C Process 19999 to 30000 units A 6 Appendix Watlow Series FAS D 9 Ordering Information 1 4 DIN Single Channel Ramping Controller Series F4 DIN Single Channel Ramping Controller F4S_ __A_ Single Channel Ramping Controller 1 universal analog input 4 digital inputs 8 digital outputs 2 alarms EIA 232 485 communications Power Supply H 100 to 240V ac dc L 24 to 28V ac dc
53. F4 Failure to do so could result in such damage and or injury or death NOTE The CMC converter requires an external power supply when used with a laptop computer Communications Wiring continued Figure 12 11a EIA TIA 232 to EIA TIA 485 Conversion 485SD9TB DB9 Connector 9 pin _ EIA 485 _ Power Supply AD 1210 120V ac B amp B Converter B amp B Electronics Manufacturing Company 815 433 5100 www bb elec com i 120V ac G 9V dc see note OH OVE y p 2 64 G COM 16 lt 5 x 3 TJR u gQ ulg4Aa 13 Of BO Q Aa DB25 Connector 25 pin CMC Converter CMC Connecticut Micro Computer Inc 800 426 2872 www 2cmc com Figure 12 11b GPIB Conversion to EIA TIA 232 or EIA TIA 485 Communications with Modbus RTU EIA 232 or EIA 485 ICS Model 4899 E Ym ICS GPIB Bus Interface ICS Electronics 925 416 1000 www icsel ect com Watlow Series F4S D Wiring 12 11 A WARNING To avoid damage to property and equipment and or injury of loss of life use National Electric Code NEC standard wiring practices to install and operate the Series F4 Failure to do so could result in such damage and or injury or death A WARNING Install high or low temperature limit control protection in systems where an over temperature fault condition could present a f
54. Fail Power System 100 to 100 expressed in Input 1 Open Loop Status 8 r 100 r 1603 1505 105 906 r w 222 104 1608 1506 109 10 108 1613 2601 r w 2611 r w 2621 r w 2631 r w 2641 r w 501 r w 511 r w 521 r w 531 r w 541 r w Input 1 Type Diagnostics Univ Input 1 Value Status value Input 1 Calibrate 0 mV Thermocouple 50 mV Thermocouple 32 Type J Ground Lead 15 0 ohms 380 0 ohms 0 000 V 10 000 V 10 4 000 mA 11 20 000 mA Input 2 AtoD Diagnostics HHHH Input 2 Error Status Input 2 Fail Power System 100 to 100 expressed in Input 2 Open Loop Status Input 2 Type Diagnostics Univ None Input 2 Value Status value Input 2 Calibrate 0 mV Thermocouple 50 mV Thermocouple 32 Type J Ground Lead 15 0 ohms 380 0 ohms 0 000 V 10 000 V 10 4 000 mA 11 20 000 mA Input 3 AtoD Diagnostics HHHH Input 3 Error Status Input 3 Type Diagnostics Univ None Input 3 Value Status value Input 3 Calibrate 0 mV Thermocouple 50 mV Thermocouple 32 Type J Ground Lead 15 0 ohms 380 0 ohms 0 000 V 10 000 V 0 4 000 mA 1 20 000 mA Integral 1A Cascade PID Set 1 Channel 1 000 to 9999 expressed in hundredths of minutes Integral 1A Cascade PID Set 2 Channel 1 000 to 9999 expressed in hundredths of minutes Integral 1A Cascade PID Set 3 Channel 1 000 to 9999 expressed in hundredths of minutes Integral 1A Cascade PID Set 4 Chann
55. Main Page Parameter Table 2 8 Overview This chapter introduces the user interface of the Series F4S D controller the displays keys and indicator lights and the principles of navigating the software to program profiles and change setup settings The Series F4 is designed with user friendly features to facilitate setup programming and operation of the Series F4 The four line LCD display facilitates setup and programming and presents informative messages about status error and alarm conditions Digital inputs digital outputs profiles and alarms can be named for easy reference The Information Key summons information about the pages menus parameters and values as well as error and alarm conditions if they occur The software is organized into five pages of menus The Main Page gives access to the other four Operations Profiles Setup and Factory The Main Page can be customized to display user chosen information Watlow Series F4S D Keys Displays and Navigation 2 1 Displays and Indicator Lights Upper Display Displays Channel 1 actual process values during operation Displays error information if errors occur Lower Display Displays information about the setup operation and programming of the controller Cursor gt Indicates selected parameter or present value in F4 mem ory Moves via the four navi gation keys Qe e tA e Go to Setup BH tA e Go to F
56. NOTE You need the equipment listed and technical skills Con trollers come calibrated from the factory Recalibrate only for other agency requirements or if temperatures arent ac curate as verified by another calibrated instrument RTD Input Procedure Equipment k9Q decade box with 0 010 resolution Input x 1 to 3 Setup and Calibration 1 Connect the correct power supply to terminals 1 2 and 3 see the Wiring Chapter and the Appendix 2 Short Input 1 terminals 60 61 and 62 Input 2 terminals 54 57 and 58 or Input 3 terminals 52 55 and 56 together with less than 0 10 Press the Right Key once at the Calibrate Input x 1 to 3 prompt At the Ground prompt press once and to store ground input press the Up Key once 3 Short Input 1 terminals 60 and 61 Input 2 ter minals 54 and 57 or Input 3 terminals 52 and 55 together with less than 0 5Q Press once at the Calibrate Input x 1 to 3 prompt At the Lead prompt press once and to store lead resistance press once 4 Connect the decade box to Input 1 terminals 60 S2 61 S1 and 62 S3 Input 2 terminals 54 S2 57 S1 and 58 S3 or Input 3 terminals 52 S2 55 S1 and 56 S3 with 20 to 24 gauge wire 5 For 1000 RTD enter 15 000 For 5000 or 1k RTD enter 240 000 Allow at least 10 seconds to stabilize Press once at the Calibrate In put x 1 to 3 prompt Factory Page At the 15 000 or 240 00Q prompt press once and to st
57. Output 1 2 3109 3110 3119 3120 3130 3140 3150 3160 3170 r w 2001 2011 2021 2031 2041 2051 2061 2071 r w 3129 3139 3149 3159 3169 3179 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Conditions for Parameters to Appear Active Always Active Always Active Always Active Always Active if the selected output is not Process Operates based on Channel 1 power requirements Active if Digital 6 or 7 Function is set to Boost Heat or Boost Cool Active if Digital 6 or 7 Function is set to Boost Heat or Boost Cool WARNING Provide a labeled switch or circuit breaker near peripheral equipment per manently connected to the Series F4 digital outputs as the means of disconnection for servicing Failure to do so could result in damage to equipment and or property and or injury or death to personnel v NOTE For more information about how parameter settings affect the con troller s operation see the Features Chapter Watlow Series FAS D Setup Setup Page Parameter Table Parameter Description Compressor On Power The compressor will be on below this chosen power level Compressor Off 6 Power The compressor will be off above this chosen power level Compressor Off Delay Set time to delay compressor turn off Compressor On Delay Set time to delay compressor turn on Range Modbus Value 100 to 100 100 to 100 Compressor on pow
58. PID Set 1 Channel 1 1918 Current Time Seconds 2557 Hysteresis 2B PID Set 6 Channel 2 2660 Proportional Band 1B Cascade PID Set 2 1919 Current Date Month 2559 Cycle Time type Control Output 2B Channel 1 1920 Current Date Day 2560 Proportional Band 2B PID Set 7 Channel 2 2661 Integral 1B Cascade PID Set 2 Channel 1 1921 Current Date Year 2561 Integral 2B PID Set 7 Channel 2 2662 Reset 1B Cascade PID Set 2 Channel 1 1922 Cascade Inner Set Point 2562 Reset 2B PID Set 7 Channel 2 2663 Derivative 1B Cascade PID Set 2 Channel 1 1923 Show F or C 2563 Derivative 2B PID Set 7 Channel 2 2664 Rate 1B Cascade PID Set 2 Channel 1 7 14 Communications Watlow Series F4S D 2680 2681 2682 2683 2684 2685 2687 Dead Band 1B Cascade PID Set 2 Channel 1 Hysteresis 1B Cascade PID Set 2 Channel 1 Proportional Band 1B Cascade PID Set 3 Channel 1 Integral 1B Cascade PID Set 3 Channel 1 Reset 1B Cascade PID Set 3 Channel 1 Derivative 1B Cascade PID Set 3 Channel 1 Rate 1B Cascade PID Set 3 Channel 1 Dead Band 1B Cascade PID Set 3 Channel 1 Hysteresis 1B Cascade PID Set 3 Channel 1 Proportional Band 1B Cascade PID Set 4 Channel 1 Integral 1B Cascade PID Set 4 Channel 1 Reset 1B Cascade PID Set 4 Channel 1 Derivative 1B Cascade PID Set 4 Channel 1 Rate 1B Cascade PID Set 4 Channel 1 Dead Band 1B Cascade PID Set 4 Channel 1 Hysteresis 1B Cascade PID Set 4 Channel 1 Proportional Band 1B
59. Page gt Go to Operations Go to Profiles Profile Light run hold status Go to Setup Profile Key run hold resumes Information Key Back terminate toggles to tips and profiles 9g P definitions about the chosen parameter Setup Page see Chapter 5 System Guar Soak Bandl Guar Soak Band2 Current Time Current Date PID Units Chl Autotune SP Ch2 Autotune SP Input 1 Fail Input 2 Fail Open Loop Chl Open Loop Ch2 Power Out Time Power Out Action Analog Input x 1 to 3 Sensor Type Decimal Altitude Units Scale Low Scale High Choose Scaling Ch2 Output Disable Enter Inl Temp Low Enter Inl Temp High SP Low Limit SP High Limit Calibration Offset Filter Time Error Latch Cascade Digital Input x 1 to 4 Name Function Condition Control Output x 1A 1B 2A or 2B Function Lower Display alarm error status information and access to software Output status Alarm status Communications status Scroll up or down Move up increase Move down decrease Next Cycle Time Process Hi Power Limit Lo Power Limit Alarm Output x 1 and 2 Name Alarm Type Alarm Source Latching Silencing Alarm Hysteresis Alarm Sides Alarm Logic Alarm Messages Retransmit Output x 1 and 2 Retransmit Source Analog Range Low Scale High Scale Scale Offset Digital Output x 1 to 8 Name Function Off Event Output Boost Heat Boost Power Boost Delay Time Boost Cool Boost Power Boost Delay Time C
60. Parameter Record Make a photocopy of this page and enter your settings on that copy Name Date Main Page Will always appear if active Input 1 Error Input 2 Error Input 3 Error Condition Condition Will appear if active and set up to appear Autotuning Channel 1 Autotuning Channel 2 Choose from the column at the far right the information you want to appear on the Main Page in any order Will always appear Go to Operations Go to Profiles Go to Setup Go to Factory Possible parameters None Input 1 Value Input 2 Value Input 3 Value Set Point 1 Set Point 2 Power 1 Power 2 Tune status 1 Tune status 2 Time Date Digital Inputs Digital Outputs Time Remaining Current File Current Step Active Chl PID Set Active Ch2 PID Set Last Jump Step Jump Count WaitFor Status Step Type Target SP1 Target SP2 Inner Set Point Custom Message 1 Custom Message 2 Custom Message 3 Custom Message 4 Inputl Cal Offset Input2 Cal Offset Input3 Cal Offset Watlow Series FAS D Setup 9 3 Sample Application Setup for Environmental Testing Analog Input 1 For greatest accuracy in measuring the chamber temperature a re sistance temperature detection RTD sensor has been wired to ana log input 1 Andy wanted to measure tenths of degrees Fahrenheit with an alarm that would dear by itself if the temperature exceed ed or fell below the activ
61. Profile 5 10 characters ASCII equivalent decimal code see Modbus Naming Flowchart Name Profile 6 10 characters Name Profile 7 10 characters Name Profile 8 10 characters Name Profile 9 10 characters Name Profile 10 10 characters Name Profile 11 10 characters Name Profile 12 10 characters Name Profile 13 10 characters Name Profile 14 10 characters Name Profile 15 10 characters Name Profile 16 10 characters Name Profile 17 10 characters Name Profile 18 10 characters Name Profile 19 10 characters Name Profile 20 10 characters Watlow Series F4S D Communications 3700 09 Name Profile 21 10 characters 4011 Ramp Time seconds 3710 19 Name Profile 22 10 characters rw 0 to 59 3720 29 Name Profile 23 10 characters 4043 Rate Ramp Rate Step 3730 39 Name Profile 24 10 characters rw 1 to 3000 units per minute 3740 49 Name Profile 25 10 characters ReName Profile see Name Profile x 3790 59 Name Profile 26 10 characters 1209 Resume a Profile Key Press Simulation 3760 69 Name Profile 27 10 characters w 1 Resume 3770 79 Name Profile 28 10 characters 25 Save Changes to EE 3780 89 Name Profile 29 10 characters w 0 3790 99 Name Profile 30 10 characters 4119 Hours Remaining Ramp Time or Soak Step Current Profile Status 3800 09 Name Profile 31 10 characters r 0 to 99 3810 19 Name Profile 32 10 characters 4120 Minutes Remaining Ramp Tim
62. Watlow France S A R L Immeuble Somag 16 Rue Amp re Cergy Pontoise CEDEX 95307 France Telephone 33 1 3073 2425 Fax 33 1 3073 2875 Watlow Italy S R L Via Meucci 14 20094 Corsico MI Italy Telephone 39 02 4588841 Fax 39 02 458 69954 Watlow Limited Robey Close Linby Industrial Estate Linby Nottingham England NG15 8AA Telephone 44 0 115 9640777 Fax 44 0 115 9640071 Latin America Watlow de M xico Av Fundici n 5 Col Parques Industriales Quer taro Qro M xico CP 76130 Telephone 52 442 217 6235 Fax 52 442 217 6403 Asia Pacific Watlow Australia Pty Ltd 23 Gladstone Park Drive Tullamarine Victoria 3043 Australia Telephone 61 39 335 6449 Fax 61 39 330 3566 Watlow China Inc 179 Zhong Shan Xi Road Hong Qiao Cointek Bldg FI 4 Unit P Shanghai 200051 China Telephone 86 21 6229 8917 Fax 86 21 6228 4654 Watlow Japan Ltd K K Azabu Embassy Heights 106 1 11 12 Akasaka Minato ku Tokyo 107 0052 Japan Telephone 81 03 5403 4688 Fax 81 03 5403 4646 Watlow Korea Co Ltd Hanil Bldg 3rd Floor 210 5 Yangje Dong Seocho Gu Seoul 137 130 Korea Telephone 82 2 575 9804 Fax 82 2 575 9831 Watlow Malaysia Sdn Bhd 38B Jalan Tun Dr Awang 11900 Bayan Lepas Penang Malaysia Telephone 60 4 641 5977 Fax 60 4 641 5979 Watlow Singapore Pte Ltd Ayer Rajah Crescent 03 23 Ayer Rajah Industrial Estate Singapore 139
63. condition Check the alarm output function the cursor at the alarm Check the C and F setting message on the Main Check the calibration offset value Set it to a Page lower level 3 8 Operations Watlow Series F4S D Indication Probable Cause s Input Errors Upper Display shows error code for input 1 only Lower Display shows error message Alarm Output Indicator is lit Upper Lower Input x 1 to 3 AtoD Upper R dgh Lower nput x 1 to 3 AtoD Upper 5 Lo Lower nput x 1 to 3 Sensor Upper 5 5h Lower nput x 1 to 3 Sensor Upper Rtod Lower Timeout System Errors Upper Display shows error numbers Lower Display mes sages indicate cause and ac tion to take Input 1 Module Error Only single channel modules supported Input 1 Module Error Only dual channel modules supported Retransmit 1 Module Error Only process modules supported Retransmit 2 Module Error Only process modules supported Cannot identify Modify Re place module Module change Defaults will occur Accept with any key First power up Parameters are initializing Firmware change Parameters are initializing Fatal Errors Controller shuts down Checksum Error Parameter memor y Checksum Error Unit config memor y Checksum Error Profile mem ory RAM Test Failed Return con troller to the Factory Flash Memory Failed Return contr
64. control output in the same direction as the proportional er ror This is caused by a change in the process vari able PV that decreases over the time of the derivative TD The TD is in units of seconds Deutsche Industrial Norm DIN A set of technical scientific and dimensional standards de veloped in Germany Many DIN standards have worldwide recognition droop n proportional controllers the difference between set point and actual value after the system stabilizes duty cycle The percentage of a cycle time in which the output is on EIA See Electronics Industries of America EIA TIA 232 422 423 and 485 Data com munications standards set by the Electronic I ndus tries of America and Telecommunications Industry Association Formerly referred to as RS Recog nized Standard Electronics Industries of America EIA An association in the US that establishes standards for electronics and data communications external transmitter power supply A dc volt age source that powers external devices filter digital A means to slow the response of a system when inputs change unrealistically or too fast Equivalent to a standard resistor capacitor RC filter A 2 Appendix Watlow Series FAS D form A A single pole single throw relay that us es only the normally open NO and common con tacts These contacts close when the relay coil is en aoe They open when power is remo
65. control uses two control loops outer and in ner to control the process The outer loop analog input 3 monitors the process or part temperature which is then compared to the set point The result of the comparison the error signal is acted on by the settings in a Cascade Outer Loop PID set 1 to 5 which then generates a power level for the outer loop The set point for the inner loop is determined by the outer loop power level and the Cascade Low Range Deviation and the Cascade High Range Devi ation settings for analog input 3 The inner loop analog input 1 monitors the energy source heating and cooling which is compared to the inner loop set point generated by the outer loop The result of the comparison the error signal is act ed on by the settings in a Cascade Inner Loop PID set 1 to 5 which generates an output power level between 100 to 100 If the power level is posi tive the heat will be on if the power level is nega tive the cool will come on In Series F4 controllers cascade control is available on channel 1 Analog input 3 is used to measure the outer loop process while analog input 1 the inner loop is used to measure the energy source Power from the energy sources are supplied by outputs 1A and 1B To set up and tune a system for cascade control see the Operations Chapter Location in software Setup Page and Operations Page Curve A PID Set Point Curve B Cascade Temperat
66. in hundredths o Reset 1A Cascade PID Set 2 Channel 1 000 to 999 ex pressed in hundredths o Reset 1A Cascade PID Set 3 Channel 1 000 to 999 ex pressed in hundredths o Reset 1A Cascade PID Set 4 Channel 1 000 to 999 ex pressed in hundredths o Reset 1A Cascade PID Set 5 Channel 1 000 to 999 ex Reset 1A PID Set 1 000 to 999 ex Reset 1A PID Set 2 000 to 999 ex Reset 1A PID Set 3 000 to 999 ex Reset 1A PID Set 4 000 to 999 ex Reset 1A PID Set 5 000 to 999 ex ressed in hundredths o Channel 1 ressed in hundredths o Channel 1 ressed in hundredths o Channel 1 pressed in hundredths o Channel 1 ressed in hundredths o Channel 1 pressed in hundredths o Reset 1B Cascade PID Set 1 Channel 1 000 to 999 ex pressed in hundredths o Reset 1B Cascade PID Set 2 Channel 1 000 to 999 ex pressed in hundredths o Reset 1B Cascade PID Set 3 Channel 1 000 to 999 ex ressed in hundredths o Reset 1B Cascade PID Set 4 Channel 1 000 to 999 ex pressed in hundredths o Reset 1B Cascade PID Set 5 Channel 1 000 to 999 ex Reset 1B PID Set 1 000 to 999 ex Reset 1B PID Set 2 000 to 999 ex Reset 1B PID Set 3 000 to 999 ex Reset 1B PID Set 4 000 to 999 ex Reset 1B PID Set 5 000 to 999 ex Reset 2A PID Set 6 000 to 999 ex Reset 2A PID Set 7 000 to 999 ex Reset 2A PID Set 8 000 to 999 ex Reset 2A PID Set 9 000 to 999 ex ressed in hu
67. in the Setup Page 3 Time 4 PID set one of five sets of heat cool PID pa rameters per channel pre defined in the Opera tions Page or 5 Guaranteed Soak requires the actual process value to stay within the Soak Band as set in the System Menu Jump J ump initiates another step or profile Define the J ump step by choosing 1 Profile to jump to 2 Step to jump to and 3 Number of Repeats v NOTE If a power out condition occurs during a profile and more than 20 jump steps are stored in the F4 s Profile Program memory the controller will terminate the profile and turn off all outputs if Continue Hold or Terminate was selected as the Power Out action If Profile Reset or Go to Idle Set Point was selected the controller will take those actions A pop up message will warn of this when the 21st jump step is programmed End End terminates the profile in a chosen state All profiles must have an End step It cannot be delet ed or changed to another step type Define the End by choosing End with Hold Control Off All Off or Idle end state Another Option Wait For Wait For is not a step type but Ramp Time Ramp Rate and Soak steps can be programmed to wait for events and processes This means the wait condi tions must be satisfied before the time dock and the step activity proceeds If the step is to wait for an analog input the actual process value must arrive at or cross the specified value bef
68. input 2 the signal to input 3 must be isolated to prevent possible ground loops RTD input Each 10 of lead wire resistance can cause a 2 F error when using a two wire RTD A threewire RTD sensor overcomes this problem AIl three wires must have the same electrical resistance i e same gauge same length multi stranded or solid same metal Process input Isolation must be maintained between input 2 and input 3 If both input 2 and input 3 are process signals a separate power supply and transmitter must be used for each input These inputs must be electrically isolated from one another to prevent ground loops 12 2 Wiring Watlow Series FAS D AN WARNING To avoid damage to property and equipment and or injury of loss of life use National Electric Code NEC standard wiring practices to install and operate the Series F4 Failure to do so could result in such damage and or injury or death A CAUTION Maintain isolation between analog inputs 2 and 3 and between analog input 1 and digital inputs 1 to 4 to prevent a ground loop A ground loop may cause incorrect readings Failure to follow this guideline could result in damage to equipment and product Input 1 Figure 12 3a Thermocouple Available on all units Impedance 20M Q BBHBOHBEB BgEBHBS 220888 ooono00000000000 popoom oo000000 gm Figure 12 3b RTD 2 or 3 Wire 1000 Platinum Available on all units
69. maintained SI Systeme Internationale The system of standard metric units switching differential See hysteresis thermal system A regulated environment that consists of a heat source heat transfer medium or load sensing device and a control instrument thermocouple t c A temperature sensing de vice made by joining two dissimilar metals This junction produces an electrical voltage in propor tion to the difference in temperature between the hot junction sensing junction and the lead wire connection to the instrument cold junction thermocouple break protection The ability of a control to detect a break in the thermocouple cir cuit and take a predetermined action time proportioning control A method of con trolling power by varying the on off duty cyde of an output This variance is proportional to the differ ence between the set point and the actual process temperature transmitter A device that transmits tempera ture data from either a thermocouple or a resis tance temperature detector RTD by way of a two wire loop The loop has an external power supply The transmitter acts as a variable resistor with re spec to its input signal Transmitters are desirable when long lead or extension wires produce unac ceptable signal degradation WatView A Windows based software application for communicating with and configuring Watlow controllers zero cross Action that provides out
70. off control However when a system settles down the temperature or process value tends to droop short of the set point With proportional control the output power level equals set point minus process value divided by propband Location in software Operations Page gt Edit PID gt PID Set Channel x 1 or 2 gt PID Set x 1 to 5 or 6 to 10 Temperature The heating action switches off when the process temperature rises above the set point 4 Set Point Hysteresis N Process Temperature The heating action switches on when the process temperature The heating action drops below the set point minus the hysteresis Switches on at startup Temperature Time The cooling action switches on when The cooling action the process temperature rises above switches the set point plus the hysteresis on at startup ee The cooling action switches off when the process Hysteresis temperature drops below the set point Process Temperature Set Point Temperature gt Time Figure 6 4a On off Control for Heating and Cooling Set Point P atis Proportional Band Droop Time Figure 6 4b Proportional Control 6 4 Features Watlow Series FAS D Proportional plus Integral PI Control The droop caused by proportional control reset can be corrected by adding integral control When the system settles down the integral v
71. proceed through the series without changing values until you find the parame ter you want to change After making the change you may back out or proceed to the end of the series v NOTE The Edit PID Menu Operations Page presents lists of parameters that can be entered and edited individually Press either Q or O to enter the value and return to the list v NOTE Make sure your setup is complete before entering profiles Certain analog input setup changes will delete profiles Main Page Go to Operations Go to Profiles gt Go to Setup Choose to Setup ____ Qo gt Control Output 1AA Control Output 1BM Control Output 2AW Choose Function gt gt Heat Cool Choose Cycle Time __ Qo gt Variable Burst Fixed Time _ v Enter Hi Power Limit Qo 100 AV Adjusts Value lt Back gt Next Enter Lo Power Limit P 0 AV Adjusts Value lt Back gt Next Choose to Setup gt Control Output 1AA Control Output 1BM Control Output 2AW Save setup changes or restore values WRestore ASave Watlow Series FAS D Keys Displays and Navigation 2 5 How to Enter Numbers and Names Many parameters require users to enter a numeri nized names such as TOO HOT for an alarm cal value Alarms digital inputs digital outputs DOOR OPEN for a digital input and GLAZE 6 for and profiles can be customized with easily recog a profile WATLOW Numbers 1 Navigate to the parameter aa A
72. running you can enter only the Pro files Page 4 10 Profile Programming Watlow Series FAS D Profiles Page Map Create Profile Name Profile Step x 1 to 256 Type Autostart Date Day Time Ramp Time Wait For Event Output 1 to 8 Time Chl SP Ch2 SP Chl PID Set x 1 to 5 Ch2 PID Set x 6 to 10 Guar Soakl Guar Soak2 Ramp Rate Wait For Event Output 1 to 8 Rate Chl SP Chl PID Set x 1 to 5 Guar Soakl Soak Wait For Event Output 1 to 8 Time Chl PID Set x 1 to 5 Ch2 PID Set x 6 to 10 Guar Soakl Guar Soak2 Jump Jump to Profile x 1 to 40 Jump to Step x Number of Repeats End Hold Control Off All Off Idle Chl Idle Set Point Ch2 Idle Set Point Edit Profile Profile x 1 to 40 Insert Step Insert Before Step x Step x 1 to 256 Type seebelow Edit Step Step x 1 to 256 Type Autostart Date Day Ramp Time Wait For Event Output 1 to 8 Time Chl SP Ch2 SP Chl PID Set x 1 to 5 Ch2 PID Set x 6 to 10 Guarantee Soakl Guarantee Soak2 Ramp Rate Wait For Event Output 1 to 8 Rate Chl SP Chl PID Set x 1 to 5 Guarantee Soakl Soak Wait For Event Output 1 to 8 Time Chl PID Set x 1 to 5 Ch2 PID Set x 6 to 10 Guarantee Soakl Guarantee Soak2 Jump Jump to Profile x 1 to 40 Jump to Step x Number of Repeats End Hold Control Off All Off Idle Chl Idle Set Point Ch2 Idle Set Point Delete Step Done Delete Profile Profile x 1 to 4
73. rw 0 to 30000 rw 000 to 999 expressed in hundredths of minutes 2665 Dead Band 1B Cascade PID Set 2 Channel 1 2513 Derivative 2A PID Set 7 Channel 2 rw 0 to 30000 rw 000 to 999 expressed in hundredths of minutes 2675 Dead Band 1B Cascade PID Set 3 Channel 1 2523 Derivative 2A PID Set 8 Channel 2 rw 0 to 30000 rw 000 to 999 expressed in hundredths of minutes 2685 Dead Band 1B Cascade PID Set 4 Channel 1 2533 Derivative 2A PID Set 9 Channel 2 rw 0 to 30000 r w 000 to 999 expressed in hundredths of minutes 2695 Dead Band 1B Cascade PID Set 5 Channel 1 2543 Derivative 2A PID Set 10 Channel 2 r w 0 to 30000 rw 000 to 999 expressed in hundredths of minutes 555 Dead Band 1B PID Set 1 Channel 1 2553 Derivative 2B PID Set 6 Channel 2 r w 0 to 30000 rw 000 to 999 expressed in hundredths of minutes 565 Dead Band 1B PID Set 2 Channel 1 2563 Derivative 2B PID Set 7 Channel 2 rw 0 to 30000 r w 000 to 999 expressed in hundredths of minutes 575 Dead Band 1B PID Set 3 Channel 1 2573 Derivative 2B PID Set 8 Channel 2 rw 0 to 30000 rw 000 to 999 expressed in hundredths of minutes 585 Dead Band 1B PID Set 4 Channel 1 2583 Derivative 2B PID Set 9 Channel 2 rw 0 to 30000 r w 000 to 999 expressed in hundredths of minutes 595 Dead Band 1B PID Set 5 Channel 1 2593 Derivative 2B PID Set 10 Channel 2 rw 0 to 30000 rw 000 to 999 expressed in hundredths of minutes 2505 Dead Band 2A PID Set 6 Channel 2 201 Digital Input 1 Status r w 1 to
74. step is located Write Modbus Register 4001 1 to 255 See End Step Type sheet for options Profiles without custom written names are referred to by their numbers Profile 1 Profile 2 etc 7 18 Communications Watlow Series FAS D F4 Modbus Applications Autostart Step Set Step Type to Autostart Write Modbus Register 4003 0 0 Every Day 1 Sunday 2 2 Monday Startona l Set Day Flag Enter Day of week 3 Tuesday Date or Day Write Modbus Register Write Modbus Register E Day 4004 1 4008 0 to 7 47 Wednesday Thursday 6 7 Friday 7 Saturday Set Date Flag Write Modbus Register Enter Hour 24 Hour 4004 0 Write Modbus Register Clock 4009 0 to 23 Format Enter Month to Start Profile Write Modbus Register 2 Enter Minute 4005 1 to 12 Write Modbus Register 4010 0 to 59 Enter Day to Start Profile Write Modbus Register Enter Second 4006 71 to 31 Write Modbus Register 4011 0 to 59 Enter Year to Start Profile Write Modbus Register Save Changes 4007 1998 to 2035 Write Modbus Register 25 0 Autostart pauses a profile until the specified date or day and time of a 24 hour clock Watlow Series F4S D Communications 7 19 F4 Modbus Applications Ramp Time Ramp Rate Soak Steps page 1 of 3 Write Modbus Register 4003 1 Wait for Digital Input 1 OFF Set Wait for Flag i Write Modbus Register Write Modbus Register 4013 1 4012 1 Time No Wait No Wait Don t Wait for Digi
75. still pending its number will appear in the Main Page display when it is no longer being awaited it will be underlined After the initial configuration of the controller the most frequent changes will be to profiles alarm set points and PID sets The Setup Page is likely to be the least frequently accessed for changes Some manufacturers may prefer to lock out this page to prevent user access Changing parameters may change other parame ters For example changing the type of units tem perature relative humidity etc will affect settings that assume either Reset or Rate and Integral or Derivative Changing from the Celsius to the Fahrenheit scale will affect every parameter with a numerical value in one or the other scale n some cases a change in one parameter will affect the de faults of others v NOTE Changes to some parameters will affect other parameters Choose P 1 Display gt None Input 1 Value 30 C E Input 2 Value 76 Y SP 26 C TargetSP1 309C SP2 10 TargetSP2 100 Inputl 26 C Input2 4 Input3 20 C PROFILE_2 Waiting Step 2 Ramp Time Wait A_2_4 D1_34 Remain 00 00 00 Jump Step 0_0 Jump Count 0 Chi PID Set 1 Ch2 PID Set 3 Powerl 0 Power2 55 Digital In _234 Digital Out 2 4 678 Time 14 15 30 Date 10 7 99 Figure 2 Example Parameters on the Custom Main Page v NOTE For defaults see the Keys Displays and Navigation Chapter 5 2 Setup Watlow Series F4S D Custom Main Page
76. to 20 mA K Solid state Form A 0 5 amp relay Output 1B A None C Open collector switched dc F Process 0 to 5 1 to 5 0 to 10V dc 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA K Solid state Form A 0 5 amp relay Output 2A C Open collector switched dc F Process 0 to 5 1 to 5 0 to 10V dc 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA K Solid state Form A 0 5 amp relay Output 2 B A None C Open collector switched dc F Process 0 to 5 1 to 5 0 to 10V dc 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA K Solid state Form A 0 5 amp relay Auxiliary Retransmit Module 0 None 1 Single retransmit output 0 to 5 1 to 5 0 to 10V dc 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA 2 Dual retransmit outputs 0 to 5 1 to 5 0 to 10V dc 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA Language and RTD Options 1 English with 100 RTD 2 German with 100 Q RTD 3 French with 100 O RTD 4 z Spanish with 100 O RTD 5 English with 500 and 1 kQ RTD 6 German with 500 and 1 kQ RTD 7 French with 500 and 1 kQ RTD 8 Spanish with 500 and 1 kQ RTD Display and Custom Options RG Standard Display Red Green display only XX Custom options software setting parameters overlay Watlow Series F4S D Appendix A 7 Index F or C 5 7 A AtoD 10 3 accuracy A 6 Action End 4 15 active output indicator lights 2 2 add step 4 6 Address 5 14 7 16 agency approvals A 6 Alarm 1 High Deviation 3 14 Alarm 1 High SP 3 14 Alarm 1 Low Deviation 3 14 Alarm 1 Low SP 3 14 Ala
77. to 99 m 0 to 59 s 0 to 59 1 to 3 000 0 degrees per minute 1 to 30000 Set point low limit to set point high limit Set point low limit to set point high limit Channel 1 PID 1 to5 Channel 2 PID 6 to 10 1 0 to 4 2 0 to 4 No 0 Yes 1 Default 00 00 01 0 0 1 1l 75 75 75 75 1 0 2 0 No 0 Modbus Register read write Conditions for I O Set Ch Parameters to Appear UN mi Active if Step is set to Ramp rw 1 4119 r hi Time or Soak 4010 r w m 4120 r m 4011 r w s 4121 r s 4043r w Active if Step is set to Rate and controller is not Dual Channel 4044r w Active if Step is set to Time or 4122r Rate 4045r w Active if Step is set to Time and 4123r controller is Dual Channel Ch Active Always 4046 r w 1 424 r 1 4047 r w 2 4125 r 2 Ch Active Always 4048 r w 1 4049 r w 2 Wait for Profile 1 to 40 Edit Step Step x 1 to 256 Ramp Time or Ramp Rate or Soak Step Wait for Step Does Does Not Wait Do not wait for any condition Step Wait For Wait for the chosen condition Does not wait 0 Wait for 1 Event Input x 1 to 4 Analog Input x 1 to 3 Y NOTE Two sets of Modbus registers contain profile informa tion In edit mode the number of the profile being edited is at 4000 and the number of the step being edited is at 4001 When the profile is running the number of the profile being ru
78. two on top two on bottom until the tips are completely retracted into the shafts 2 Slidethetip of a flat screwdriver between the case and the center top side of the mounting bracket Rotate the screwdriver 90 degrees stretching the bracket away from the case so the hooks on the bracket disengage from the slots on the case Hold the bracket and press the controller forward slightly to prevent the disengaged hooks from snapping back into the slots 3 Repeat this operation to disengage the hooks on the bottom side of the mounting bracket 4 Press with one or two fingers on the lower half of the back of the unit so that the controller slides forward through the panel Hold the bracket steady do not pull back Be ready to support the controller as it comes through the front panel Remove the mounting brackets and retention collar from the back side of the panel Figure 11 3b Tightening the Screws Figure 11 3c Disengaging the Mounting Bracket Watlow Series FAS D Installation 11 3 Notes 11 4 Installation Watlow Series F4S D 12 Chapter Twelve Wiring Input to Output Isolation 12 1 Power Wiring llle 12 2 Sensor Installation Guidelines 12 2 Input 1 irem wheeled ate ea wed RS 12 3 Inputs x 2 and 3 0 00 e eee eee 12 4 Digital Inputs x 1 to 4 0005 12 6 Outputs x 1A 1B 2A and 2B 12 7 Retransmit an
79. 0 Re Name Profile Profile x 1 to 40 Some parameters may not appear depending on the model and configuration of the controller Watlow Series FAS D Profile Programming 4 11 Profiles Page Parameter Table Modbus Register Range read write Conditions for Parameter Description Modbus Value Default VO Set Ch Parameters to Appear Autostart gt Edit Profile gt Profile x 1 to 40 gt Edit Step gt Step x 1 to 256 gt Autostart Step Date M D Y today s date 4004 Date Active Always Dat or Day Set date to Iba x 4005 mo day 1to 31 4007 yr yr 1998 to 2035 sd Day Every Day 0 Every Day 0 4008 r w Active Always 1 Set day of the week eed p to autostart Tuesday 3 Wednesday 4 Thursday 5 Friday 6 Saturday 7 Time 00 00 00 to 23 59 59 00 00 00 4009 Active Always h 0 to 23 h 0 4010 Set time to m 0 to 59 m 0 4011 autostart s 0 to 59 s 0 did Ramp Time or Ramp Rate or Soak Step gt Edit Profile gt Profile x 1 to 40 gt Edit Step gt Step x 1 to 256 gt Ramp Time or Ramp Rate or Soak Step Wait for Step does not wait 0 Step does not 4012r w Active if digital inputs are config i wait 0 ured as wait for events Wait for an event or Ste Waits for 1 0 4103 r process value Digi tal inputs must be configured in the Setup Page before they can be used here The F4 can be programmed to wait for up to 4 event in puts and 3 analog in puts
80. 0 character names See the Setup Chapter 4 Program the Profile Andy programmed the test as a ramping pro file of 21 steps To make sure the equipment is at the ambient chamber temperature he put a Wait condition on Step 2 Step 20 is a J ump step that puts the equipment through the same heat and humidity cyde 21 times See the Profile Programming Chapter v NOTE The profile in this sample application is embedded in the Series F4 software for use as a teaching tool or a template It is the first profile MILSTD810D located in the Profiles Page Edit Profile Menu You can change or delete this profile and later recall it through factory defaults If you have a single channel controller you will see only the tem perature on Channel 1 This is not the true Military Standard Test 810D This sample application is continued in the Operations Profile Programming and Setup Chapters Watlow Series FAS D Introduction 1 3 Setup Steps e If the Series FA is an independent unit start with Step 1 below e If the Series F4 is already installed in and set up for a piece of equipment proceed to Steps 4 5 6 and 7 below What to do e f the Series F4 is already installed in a piece of equipment and the setup and profile pro gramming functions are locked proceed direct ly to Step 5 or 7 How to do it 1 Install the controller See Chapter 11 Installation This step will not be necessary if the Seri
81. 0 seconds Set Point Low 1096 Set Point High 90 No Calibration Offset 1 second Filter Self clearing Error Digital Inputs Then he set up the digital inputs for remote functions Digital input 1 would be wired to a key lock switch that requires the operator to have a key to operate the controller and chamber Digital input 2 would be wired to a door switch to stop the pro file if the chamber door opens Digital Input 1 Name KEYLOCK Function Panel lock Condition Start on high Digital Input 2 Name Default Function Pause Condition High Analog Input 3 A thermocouple type J sensor was adequate to measure the temperature of the equipment itself analog input 3 The other settings remained the same as analog input 1 Sensor Thermocouple Type J Decimal Point Whole numbers only Digital Output 6 For heating and cooling capacity and to accommodate the com pressor Andy assigned these functions to Digital outputs 6 7 and 8 Digital output 6 wired toa big auxiliary heater was set up to kick in only when the main heater worked at greater than 90 power boost power level for more than 20 seconds boost delay Name BOOST HEAT Function Boost heat Boost Power Level 90 Boost Delay 20 seconds There was no computer connection so Andy skipped Communications Then he left the Setup Page and went to the Factory Page where he put a password lock on the Setup Page Profile Page and Factory
82. 032 0 Wait for Analog Input 1 E cora ere Write Modbus Register Zz 4021 1 No Wait Don t Wait for Analog Input 1 What value 7 Write Modbus Register Write Modbus Register Write cea Register 4021 0 4022 value Write Modbus Register 4033 0 Write Modbus Register 4034 0 Wait for Analog Input d Write Modbus Register Write Modbus Register 4034 1 4023 1 E No Wait Don t Wait for Analog Input 2 What value Write Modbus Register Write Modbus Register Write Modbus Register 4023 0 4024 value 4035 1 Write Modbus Register 4035 0 Wait for Analog Input 3 Write Modbus Register F 4025 4 Write dr AP Don t Wait for Analog Input 3 What value Write Modbus Register Write Modbus Register 4025 0 4026 value Write Modbus Register 4037 1 Write Modbus Register 4036 0 No Wait Write Modbus Register 4037 0 Analog inputs and digital outputs must be configured before programming a profile See Setup Page Map Watlow Series FAS D Communications 7 21 F4 Modbus Applications Ramp Time Ramp Rate Soak Steps page 3 of 3 Time Soak or Rate Based Step Enter Rate Value Write Modbus Register Rate 4043 value Enter PID Set Channel Referenced as Enter Ramp Set Point Write Modbus Register Channel 1 Time Soak 4046 0 to 4 PID 1 to 5 on front panel Write Modbus Register 4044 value Enter Hours Write Modbus Register 4909701039 Enter PID Set Channel 2 Referenced as Ent
83. 0mA The set point will be limited to the range between scale low and scale high Location in software Setup Page gt Retransmit Output x 1 or 2 Event With an event input an operator can perform cer tain operations on a system by opening or closing a switch or applying a dc logic signal to the con troller This feature can add convenience safety or security to a system In the Series F4 digital inputs 1 to 4 can be as signed as wait for events as well as other process control features Location in software Setup Page gt Digital Input x 1 to 4 Condition Retransmit Retransmit outputs 1 and 2 can retransmit an ana log signal to serve as an input variable for another device The signal may serve as a remote set point for another controller or as input for a chart recorder to document system performance over time Location in software Setup Page Temperature High Limit of selected Sensor Range s SP High Limit Range between High Limit of Sensor and SP Low Limit SP High mue Set Point Range must be between SP Low Limit and SP High Limit SP Low Limit SP Low Limit Range between Low Limit of Sensor and SP High Limit Low Limit of selected Sensor Range m Figure 6 3a Sensor Ranges Watlow Series FAS D Features 6 3 Control Methods On Off Control On off control switches the output either full on or full off depending on the input set point and hys teresis values T
84. 10 Cascade veux ee eee der Ee Gok 6 11 Watlow Series FAS D Features 6 1 Inputs Outputs Ca l l b rati on Offset The negative calibration offset will 3 compensate for the difference Calibration offset allows a device to compensate for Jost ARE between the sensor reading and an inaccurate sensor lead resistance or other fac dst tors that affect the input value A positive offset in creases the input value and a negative offset de creases the input value Temperature You can view or change the offset value of inputs 1 2 or 3 with the Calibration Offset parameter Location in software Setup Page gt Analog Input x 1 to 3 Actual Process Temperature Time Figure 6 2a Calibration Offset Filter Time Constant A time filter smooths an input signal by applying a first order filter time constant to the signal Either the displayed value or both the displayed and con trol values can be filtered Filtering the displayed value makes it easier to monitor Filtering the sig nal may improve the performance of PID control in a noisy or very dynamic system Unfiltered Input Signal Temperature A positive value affects only the viewed values A ame negative value affects both the viewed and control values Location in software Setup Page Analog Inputs x Filtered Input Signal 1 to 3 Temperature Time Figure 6 2b Filtered and Unfiltered Input Signals Open
85. 16 1402 3 Page Set Point 1 4 3 Input 2 1403 4 Set Point 2 5 Value 2 1404 5 Power 1 6 4 Set Point1 1405 6 Tune status 1 8 ponto 1407 8 Tune status 2 9 Ed Pont 1408 o Dem EE No Han 22 Digital Inputs 12 1411 12 Digital Outputs 13 UlTero amp SP1 3412 13 Time Remaining 14 23 1413 14 Current File 15 8 Target SP2 1414 15 Current Step 16 24 1415 16 Active Ch1 PID Set 17 9 WaitFor Active Ch2 PID Set 18 Status 21 Last J ump Step 19 10 Time Re J ump Count 20 maining 14 WaitF or Status 21 11 Digital In Step Type 22 puts 12 Target SP1 23 12 Digital Target SP2 24 Outputs 13 Inner Set Point 25 13 96 Power 1 Custom Message 1 26 6 Custom Message 2 27 14 Power 2 Custom Message 3 n 7 Custom M essage 4 29 Input1 Cal Offset 30 m ine aa Input2 Cal Offset 31 Input3 Cal Offset 32 Process Display Main Setup Process Display Input 1 Only Input 1 0 Input 1 0 5500 Alternating 1 Alternating Display Input 1 Display Time 0 5501 1 to 999 5502 2 Input 2 Display Time 0 5503 3 to 999 Input 3 Display Time 0 to 999 Static Message Main Setup Static Message selected by user ASCII Values Message 1 to 4 Message X v NOTE For more information about how parameter settings affect the con troller s operation see the Features Chapter 4501 4518 1 Active Always 4521 4538 2 4541 4558 3 4561 4
86. 1A Cascade PID Set 3 Channel 1 1610 Process Output 1B 20 000mA Calibrate 2524 Rate 2A PID Set 8 Channel 2 2630 Proportional Band 1A Cascade PID Set 4 1611 Process Output 1B 1 000V Calibrate 2525 Dead Band 2A PID Set 8 Channel 2 Channel 1 1612 Process Output 1B 10 000V Calibrate 2527 Hysteresis 2A PID Set 8 Channel 2 2631 Integral 1A Cascade PID Set 4 Channel 1 1613 Input 3 Calibrate 2530 Proportional Band 2A PID Set 9 Channel 2 2632 Reset 1A Cascade PID Set 4 Channel 1 1614 Process Output 2A 4 000mA Calibrate 2531 Integral 2A PID Set 9 Channel 2 2633 Derivative 1A Cascade PID Set 4 Channel 1 1615 Process Output 2A 20 000mA Calibrate 2532 Reset 2A PID Set 9 Channel 2 2634 Rate 1A Cascade PID Set 4 Channel 1 1616 Process Output 2A 1 000V Calibrate 2533 Derivative 2A PID Set 9 Channel 2 2635 Dead Band 1A Cascade PID Set 4 Channel 1 1617 Process Output 2A 10 000V Calibrate 2534 Rate 2A PID Set 9 Channel 2 2637 Hysteresis 1A Cascade PID Set 4 Channel 1 1619 Process Output 2B 4 000mA Calibrate 2535 Dead Band 2A PID Set 9 Channel 2 2640 Proportional Band 1A Cascade PID Set 5 1620 Process Output 2B 20 000mA Calibrate 2537 Hysteresis 2A PID Set 9 Channel 2 Channel 1 1621 Process Output 2B 1 000V Calibrate 2540 Proportional Band 2A PID Set 10 Channel 2 2641 Integral 1A Cascade PID Set 5 Channel 1 1622 Process Output 2B 10 000V Calibrate 2541 Integral 2A PID Set 10 Channel 2 2642 Reset 1A Casca
87. 1B 2A and 2B Main gt Setup gt Control Output x 1A 1B 2A and 2B Function Off 0 Heat 1A and Select type of func Heat 1 2A 1 tion er out Cool 2 ao 2B Choose Cycle Time Variable Burst 0 Enter the value of Fixed Time 1 the variable burst cycle time Enter Cycle Time 1 to 60 Fixed Time Select the duration 1 to 600 1 0 sec 10 of cycle Process 4 to 20mA 0 4 to 20mA 0 Set process output 0 to 20mA 1 type 0 to 5V 2 1 to 5V 3 0 to 10V 4 High Power Limit Low Limit 1 to 10096 100 100 Set high limit con Low Limit 1 to 100 trol PID mode only output power level Low Power Limit 096 to High Limit 1 0 0 Set low limit control PID mode only output power level 0 to High Limit 1 v NOTE For more information about how parameter settings affect the con troller s operation see the Features Chapter Modbus Register read write LO Set Ch Input 1060 1 1062 2 1064 3 1066 4 r w Input 1061 1 1063 2 1065 3 1067 4 r w Output 700 1A 717 1B 734 2A 751 2B r w Output 509 1A 559 1B 2509 2A 2559 2B r w Output 506 1A 556 1B 2506 2A 2556 2B r w Output 701 1A 718 1B 735 2A 752 2B r w Output 714 1A 731 1B 748 2A 765 2B r w Output 715 1A 732 1B 749 2A 766 2B r w Conditions for Parameters to Appear Active Always While a profile is running the controller will not recogn
88. 2 Wade Tor Starts Time Remaining Digital Ins Digital Outs Powerl Power2 Date Time Will appear by default Profile information will appear by default if a profile is running Will always appear unless customized gt Go to Go to Go to Go to Profiles Setup Factory Dual Channel Figure 2 3 Default Main Page Parameters pan Operations x sen information To do so go to the Setup Page Custom Main Page Menu See Chapter 5 Setup for instructions The following parameters will appear by default on the Main Page unless the Main Page has been cus tomized Press to scroll down the list Read only information Static set point control Read only information Access to software Watlow Series F4S D Keys Displays and Navigation 2 3 Keys and Navigation Setup Page Main gt Setup Choose to Setup gt System Think of this display as a window into the software table You move around in the software using the WATLOW Tr d following navigation keys e Move Up Increase gt e Move Down Decrease Back Next e Main Page gt Go to Profiles A Up and Down Keys Go to Setup E An Move Up Increase and Move Go to Factory Down Decrease Go e Move the cursor position in the Profile Key Lower Display through the Profile Run Hold software in the direction of the key Summons a menu that allows arrow Increase or decrease a you to start hold resume or O value
89. 3 How to Program a New Profile The Series F 4 uses a question and answer format to prompt you to define the steps and step types of a new profile Here s how 1 Go to the Profiles Page Move the cursor to Go to Profiles at the bottom of the Main Page then press the Right Key 2 Create a new profile Press O 3 Name the profile Unless the equipment manufacturer has locked out this function you can name your profiles for easy reference Names can have up to 10 char acters To name a profile Press Q toenter the name space and the first position e PresstheUp or Down Key O Q to scroll through the alphabet and choose the letter or number See Chapter 2 Navigation for the character selections available e Press G to move tothe next position Continue until the name is complete or until you move through the name space into the next screen Enter tosavethe name of the profile This name will be stored in the Series F 4 s memory and will appear on the Main Page when you run the profile 4 Choose the step type There are six step types each of which must be defined through different parameters See Step Types earlier in this chapter 5 Define each step type The Series F4 prompts you to define the param eters of each step type For example when you choose Ramp Time the Profile Guide asks if you want the step to wait for an event or process input before starting whe
90. 3 When autotuning is finished proceed with another PID set In the example above the user would first auto tune a PID set for subzero operation and then an other for operation at boiling temperatures When programming a profile the user could then select a different PID set for each step depending on the thermal requirements v NOTE Autotuning cannot be done while running a profile It can only be initiated when the controller is in the Static Set Point Control mode Watlow Series FAS D Operations 3 5 Cascade Cascade control is available on the Series F 4 con trollers For background information about cascade control see the F eatures Chapter Select cascade control through the Analog I nput 3 Menu Setup Page and choose Process Cascade or Deviation Cascade To set the range for the Process Cascade nner Loop se point use Low and High Range settings These are independent of the Chan nel 1 set point Deviation Cascade uses Deviation Low and High settings that are referenced to the Channel 1 set point Deviation Cascade is used in applications with large set point ranges or where limiting heating or cooling equipment temperatures is required When tuning a cascade system the inner loop must be tuned first The inner loop comprises outputs 1A and 1B and theAnalog Input 1 sensor which usually measures the energy source temperature The output device controls a power switching device which in turn switch
91. 3 2 1995 With A1 3 1999 Harmonic Current Emissions EN 61000 3 3 1995 With A1 1998 Voltage Fluctuations and Flicker 73 23 EEC Low Voltage Directive EN 61010 1 1993 With A1 1995 Safety Requirements of electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use Part 1 General requirements d clare que le produit suivant D signation Num ros de mod les Francais S ries F4 FA S D ou P H ou L C E Fou K A C E F ou K A C F ou K A C F K 0 ou 6 0 1 ou 2 N importe quelle combinaison de trois lettres ou chiffres R gulation de temp rature Cat gorie d installation Il Degr de pollution 2 Tension nominale 100 240 V c a ou 24 28 V x c a ou c c Fr quence nominale 50 ou 60 Hz Consommation d alimentation nominale 39 VA maximum Classification R pond aux normes essentielles des directives suivantes de l Union europ enne en utilisant les standards normalis s ci dessous qui expliquent les normes auxquelles r pondre Directive 89 336 CEE sur la compatibilit lectromagn tique EN 61326 1997 avec A1 1998 Mat riel lectrique destin l talonnage au contr le et l utilisation en laboratoire Exigences CEM Immunit indus trielle Emissions de cat gorie A EN 61000 4 2 1996 Avec A1 1998 Immunit aux d charges lectrostatiques EN 61000 4 3 1997 Immunit aux champs de radiation EN 61000 4 4 1995 Immunit contre les surtensions lectriques
92. 4S D 574 r w 584 r w 594 r w 2504 r w 2514 r w 2524 r w 2534 r w 2544 r w 2554 r w 2564 r w 2574 r w 2584 r w 2594 r w 2602 r w 2612 r w 2622 r w 2632 r w 2642 r w 502 r w 512 r w 522 r w 532 r w 542 r w 2652 r w 2662 r w 2672 r w 2682 r w 2692 r w 552 r w 562 r w 572 r w 582 r w 592 rw 2502 rw 2512 r w 2522 rw 2532 rw 2542 r w 2552 r w Rate 1B PID Set 3 Channel 1 000 to 999 ex ressed in hundredths o Rate 1B PID Set 4 Channel 1 000 to 999 ex pressed in hundredths o Rate 1B PID Set 5 Channel 1 000 to 999 ex pressed in hundredths o Rate 2A PID Set 6 Channel 2 000 to 999 ex pressed in hundredths o Rate 2A PID Set 7 Channel 2 000 to 999 ex pressed in hundredths o Rate 2A PID Set 8 Channel 2 000 to 999 ex pressed in hundredths o Rate 2A PID Set 9 Channel 2 000 to 999 ex Rate 2A PID Set 10 000 to 999 ex pressed in hundredths o Channel 2 ressed in hundredths o Rate 2B PID Set 6 Channel 2 000 to 999 ex ressed in hundredths o Rate 2B PID Set 7 Channel 2 000 to 999 ex ressed in hundredths o Rate 2B PID Set 8 Channel 2 000 to 999 ex ressed in hundredths o Rate 2B PID Set 9 Channel 2 000 to 999 ex Rate 2B PID Set 10 000 to 999 ex ressed in hundredths o Channel 2 ressed in hundredths o Reset 1A Cascade PID Set 1 Channel 1 000 to 999 ex pressed
93. 5 587 590 591 592 593 594 595 597 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 610 611 612 613 614 615 Hysteresis 1A PID Set 2 Channel 1 Proportional Band 1A PID Set 3 Channel 1 Integral 1A PID Set 3 Channel 1 Reset 1A PID Set 3 Channel 1 Derivative 1A PID Set 3 Channel 1 Rate 1A PID Set 3 Channel 1 Dead Band 1A PID Set 3 Channel 1 Hysteresis 1A PID Set 3 Channel 1 Proportional Band 1A PID Set 4 Channel 1 Integral 1A PID Set 4 Channel 1 Reset 1A PID Set 4 Channel 1 Derivative 1A PID Set 4 Channel 1 Rate 1A PID Set 4 Channel 1 Dead Band 1A PID Set 4 Channel 1 Hysteresis 1A PID Set 4 Channel 1 Proportional Band 1A PID Set 5 Channel 1 Integral 1A PID Set 5 Channel 1 Reset 1A PID Set 5 Channel 1 Derivative 1A PID Set 5 Channel 1 Rate 1A PID Set 5 Channel 1 Dead Band 1A PID Set 5 Channel 1 Hysteresis 1A PID Set 5 Channel 1 Proportional Band 1B PID Set 1 Channel 1 Integral 1B PID Set 1 Channel 1 Reset 1B PID Set 1 Channel 1 Derivative 1B PID Set 1 Channel 1 Rate 1B PID Set 1 Channel 1 Dead Band 1B PID Set 1 Channel 1 Cycle Time value Control Output 1B Hysteresis 1B PID Set 1 Channel 1 Cycle Time Type Control Output 1B Proportional Band 1B PID Set 2 Channel 1 Integral 1B PID Set 2 Channel 1 Reset 1B PID Set 2 Channel 1 Derivative 1B PID Set 2 Channel 1 Rate 1B PID Set 2 Channel 1 Dead Band 1B PID Set 2 Channel 1 Hysteresis 1B PID Set
94. 578 4 Conditions for Parameters to Appear Active Always Active Always Active if Inputs 2 and or 3 are active Watlow Series F4S D Setup Setup Page Parameter Record Make a photocopy of this page and enter your settings on that copy Name Date System Menu Setting Guar Soak Band 1 Guar Soak Band 2 Current Time Current Date PID Units For C Show F or C Chi Autotune SP Ch2 Autotune SP Input 1 Fail Input 2 Fail Open Loop Chl Open Loop Ch2 Power Out Time Power Out Action Input Menu Analog In 1 Analog In 2 AnalogIn 3 DigitalIn 1 DigitalIn2 DigitalIn3 Digital In 4 Sensor Type Decimal Altitude Units Scale Low Scale High Choose Scaling Ch2 Output Disable Enter Inl Temp Low Enter Inl Temp High SP Low Limit SP High Limit Calibration Offset Filter Time Error Latch Cascade Name Function Condition Control Output Menu Output 1A Output 1B Output 2A Output2B Alarm 1 Alarm2 Retrans1 Retrans 2 Function Cycle Time Process Type Hi Power Limit Lo Power Limit Alarm Name Alarm Type Alarm Source Latching Silencing Alarm Hysteresis Alarm Sides Alarm Logic Alarm Messages Retransmit Source Analog Range Low Scale High Scale Scale Offset Digital Output Menu Digit Out 1 Digit Out 2 Digit Out 3 Digit Out 4 Digit Out5 Digit Out 6 Digit Out7 Digit Out 8 Name Function Boost Power Boost Delay Compressor On Power Compressor Off Power Compressor On Delay Compresso
95. 9 Process Display Input 3 Time 0 to 999 Process Output 1A 1 000V Calibrate 0000 to 3000 expressed in thousandths volts Process Output 1A 10 000V Calibrate 0000 to 12000 expressed in thousandths volts Process Output 1A 20 000mA Calibrate 0000 to 24000 expressed in microamps Process Output 1A 4 000mA Calibrate 0000 to 6000 expressed in microamps Process Output 1B 1 000V Calibrate 0000 to 3000 expressed in thousandths volts Process Output 1B 10 000V Calibrate 0000 to 12000 expressed in thousandths volts Process Output 1B 20 000mA Calibrate 0000 to 24000 expressed in microamps Watlow Series FAS D Communications 1609 1616 1617 1615 1614 1621 1622 1620 1619 608 rw 618 rw 628 rw 701 r w 718 r w 735 r w 752 r w 1309 r w 2600 r w 2610 r w 2620 r w 2630 r w 2640 r w 500 r w 510 r w 520 r w 530 r w Process Output 1B 4 000mA Calibrate 0000 to 6000 expressed in microamps Process Output 2A 1 000V Calibrate 0000 to 3000 expressed in thousandths volts Process Output 2A 10 000V Calibrate 0000 to 12000 expressed in thousandths volts Process Output 2A 20 000mA Calibrate 0000 to 24000 expressed in microamps Process Output 2A 4 000mA Calibrate 0000 to 6000 expressed in microamps Process Output 2B 1 000V Calibrate 0000 to 3000 expressed in thousandths volts Process Output 2B 10 000V Calibrate 0000 to 12000
96. 9 R 82 3890 3899 40 S 83 T 84 Note There are ten U 85 Modbus Registers for M 86 each profile name Ww 87 X 88 M 89 Z 90 Watlow Series F4S D Communications 7 25 F4 Modbus Applications Monitor Current Profile File Number Read Modbus Register 4100 Monitor Current Profile Step Number Read Modbus Register 4101 Monitor Current Profile Step Type Read Modbus Register 4102 Monitor Profile Ramp Waiting Read Modbus Register 4103 Monitor Profile Waiting for Event 1 Read Modbus Register 4104 Monitor Profile Waiting for Event 2 Read Modbus Register 4105 Monitor Profile Waiting for Event 3 Read Modbus Register 4106 Monitor Profile Waiting for Event 4 Read Modbus Register 4107 Monitor Profile Waiting Analog Input 1 Read Modbus Register 4108 Monitor Profile Waiting Analog Input 2 Monitor Current Step Monitor Digital Output 1 Read Modbus Register 4111 Monitor Digital Output 2 Read Modbus Register 4112 Monitor Digital Output 3 Read Modbus Register 4113 Monitor Digital Output 4 Read Modbus Register 4114 Monitor Digital Output 5 Read Modbus Register 4115 Monitor Digital Output 6 Read Modbus Register 4116 Monitor Digital Output 7 Read Modbus Register 4117 Monitor Digital Output 8 Read Modbus Register 4118 Monitor Hours Remaining Read Modbus Register 4119 Monitor Minutes Remaining Read Modbus Register Monitor Set Point Ch1 Read Modbus Register 4122 Monitor
97. 91 10 r w Reset x A or B 0 00 per minute to Oper minute 2A 2B Se Activeif PID Units Setup Page Se the reset timein 99 99 per minute 0 ces e is set to U S and Proportional repeats per minute 0 to 9999 25222572 8 Band is not set to 0 2532 2582 9 2542 2592 10 r w Derivative x A or B 0 00 to 9 99 minutes 0 00 minutes 2A 2B Se Activeif PID Units Setup Page Set the derivative 0 to 999 0 pena a is set to SI and Proportional time 2523 2573 8 Band is not set to 0 2533 2583 9 2543 2593 10 r w Rate x A or B 0 00 to 9 99 minutes 0 00 minutes 2A 2B Se Activeif PID Units Setup Page Set theratetime 016995 0 Amas j is Set to U S and Proportional 2524 2574 8 Band is not set to O 2534 2584 9 2544 2594 10 r w Y NOTE Press the Information Key for more task related tips 3 12 Operations Watlow Series F4S D Operations Page Parameter Table Range Parameter Description Modbus Value Default Dead Band x A or B 0 to 30000 0 0 Define the effective 1 to 30000 shift in the heating and cooling set points to prevent conflict Hysteresis x A or B 1 to 30000 3 3 1 to 30000 Define the process variable change from the set point re quired to re energize the output in on off mode Modbus Register read write I O Set Ch 2A 2B Set 2505 2555 6 2515 2565 7 2525 2575 8 2535 2585 9 2545 2595 10 r w 2A 2B Se 2507 2557 6 2517 2567 7 2527 2577
98. 949 Telephone 65 773 9488 Fax 65 778 0323 Watlow Electric Taiwan 10F 1 No 189 Chi Shen 2nd Road Kaohsiung Taiwan Telephone 886 7 288 5168 Fax 886 7 288 5568
99. 999 expressed in hundredths of minutes Restore Factory Calibration 0 Input 1 1 Input 2 2 Input 3 Retransmit 1 Type Diagnostics 0 None 1 Process Retransmit 2 Type Diagnostics 0 None 1 Process Retransmit Output 1 1 000V Calibrate v NOTE For more information about parameters see the Index 0000 to 3000 expressed in thousandths volts Retransmit Output 1 10 000V Calibrate 0000 to 12000 expressed in thousandths volts Retransmit Output 1 20 000mA Calibrate 0000 to 24000 expressed in microamps Retransmit Output 1 4 000mA Calibrate 0000 to 6000 expressed in microamps Retransmit Output 2 1 000V Calibrate 0000 to 3000 expressed in thousandths volts Retransmit Output 2 10 000V Calibrate 0000 to 12000 expressed in thousandths volts Retransmit Output 2 20 000mA Calibrate 0000 to 24000 expressed in microamps Retransmit Output 2 4 000mA 0000 to 6000 expressed in microamps Retransmit Source Retransmit Output 1 Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Set Point 1 Set Point 2 Channel 1 Power Channel 2 Power Retransmit Source Retransmit Output 2 Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Set Point 1 Set Point 2 Channel 1 Power Channel 2 Power Save Changes to EE 0 Save Scale High Analog Input 1 Onrwnro o ouarhwn o Scale High Analog Input 2 Scale High Analog Input 3 Scale Low Analog Input 1 Scale Low Analog Input 2 Scale Low Analog Input 3 Scale Offset Retransmit Output 1 1
100. 9999 to 30000 Range Low to Range High Scale Offset Retransmit Output 2 19999 to 30000 Range Low to Range High Sensor Type Analog Input 1 0 J 1 K 2 T 3 E 4 N 5 C 6 D 7 PT2 8 R 9 S 10 B Depends on sensor and decimal point selection Depends on sensor and decimal point selection Depends on sensor and decimal point selection Depends on sensor and decimal point selection Depends on sensor and decimal point selection Depends on sensor and decimal point selection Watlow Series F4S D Communications 7 9 611 rw 621 rw 600 rw 610 rw 620 rw 11 1000 DIN RTD 12 1000 JIS RTD 13 4to 20 mA 14 0to20 mA 15 0to 5V 16 1to5V 17 Oto 10V 18 0 to 50mV 23 5000 DIN RTD 24 5000 JIS RTD 25 1kQ DIN RTD 26 1kQ JIS RTD Sensor Type Analog Input 2 PD VIRE MARS N OONDOAHRWMH O 10 B 11 1000 DIN RTD 12 1000 JIS RTD 13 4t020 mA 14 0to020 mA 15 Oto 5V 16 1to5V 17 0to 10V 18 0to50mV 19 Vaisala 0 to 5V 20 Vaisala 0 to 10V 21 Vaisala 0 to 20mA 22 Rotronics 0 to 5V 23 5000 DIN RTD 24 5000 JIS RTD 25 1kQ DIN RTD 26 1kQ JIS RTD Sensor Type Analog Input 3 0 J 1 K 2 T 3 E 4 N 5 C 6 D 7 PT2 8 R 9 S 10 B 11 1000 DIN RTD 12 1000 JIS RTD 13 4to 20 mA 14 0to20 mA 15 Oto 5V 16 1to5V 17 0to10V 18 0to50mV 23 5000 DIN RTD 24 5000 JIS RTD 25 1kQ DIN RTD 26 1kQ JIS RTD Sensor Analog Input 1 0 Thermocouple 1 RTD 2 Process 4 Off Sensor Analog Input 2 Th
101. ARNING Provide a labeled switch or circuit breaker connected to the Series F4 power wiring as the means of disconnection for servicing Failure to do so could result in damage to equipment and or property and or injury or death to personnel AA WARNING To avoid damage to property and equipment and or injury of loss of life use National Electric Code NEC standard wiring practices to install and operate the Series F4 Failure to do so could result in such damage and or injury or death A CAUTION Maintain isolation between analog inputs 2 and 3 and between analog input 1 and digital inputs 1 to 4 to prevent a ground loop A ground loop may cause incorrect readings Failure to follow this guideline could result in damage to equipment and product Power Wiring Use only number 14 AWG copper conductor rated for at least 60 C 100 to 240V ac dc nominal 85 to 264 actual F4_H ____ 24 to 28V ac dc nominal 21 to 30 actual F4 _ Eu oe Se he The Series F4 has a non operator replaceable fuse Type T time lag rated at 2 0 or 5 0A 9250V zu fuse L1 1 L2 2 Earth Ground 3 Z Dan ooo ooo00000 ooo me 4 E P E E E St pL SL 9L Figure 12 2 Power wiring Sensor Installation Guidelines Thermocouple inputs Extension wire for thermocouples must be of the same alloy as the thermocouple to limit errors If a grounded thermocouple is required for
102. Alarm 1 value Alarm High Set Point and Deviation Alarm 1 value Autotune Set Point Channel 1 value Autotune Channel 1 Idle Set Point Channel 1 Power Out Action Clear Error 1 Key Press Simulation Clear Alarm 1 Key Press Simulation Silence Alarm 1 Key Press Simulation Set Point 2 value Alarm Low Set Point and Deviation Alarm 2 value Alarm High Set Point and Deviation Alarm 2 value Autotune Set Point Channel 2 value Autotune Channel 2 Idle Set Point Channel 2 Power Out Action Clear Error 2 Key Press Simulation Clear Alarm 2 Key Press Simulation Silence Alarm 2 Key Press Simulation Autotune Cascade Clear Error 3 Key Press Simulation Proportional Band 1A PID Set 1 Channel 1 Integral 1A PID Set 1 Channel 1 Reset 1A PID Set 1 Channel 1 Derivative 1A PID Set 1 Channel 1 Rate 1A PID Set 1 Channel 1 Dead Band 1A PID Set 1 Channel 1 Cycle Time value Control Output 1A Hysteresis 1A PID Set 1 Channel 1 Cycle Time Type Control Output 1A Proportional Band 1A PID Set 2 Channel 1 Integral 1A PID Set 2 Channel 1 Reset 1A PID Set 2 Channel 1 Derivative 1A PID Set 2 Channel 1 Rate 1A PID Set 2 Channel 1 Dead Band 1A PID Set 2 Channel 1 517 520 521 522 523 524 525 527 530 531 532 533 534 535 537 540 541 542 543 544 545 547 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 567 570 571 572 573 574 575 577 580 581 582 583 584 58
103. B tion for the process 1615 2A 1620 2B output Rexmit 1625 1 1630 2 1 000V 0 000 to 3 000V 1 000V Output Active Always 1606 1A Store 1 000V cali 0 to 3000 1000 1611 1B bration for the pro 1616 2A 1621 2B cess output Raxmit 1626 1 1631 2 10 000V 0 000 to 12 000V 10 000V Output Active Always 1607 1A Store 10 000V cali 0 to 12000 10000 1612 1B bration for the pro 1617 2A 1622 2B cess output Remit 1627 1 1632 2 w Restore Input x 1 to 3 Calibration Main gt Factory gt Calibration Restore Input x 1 to 3 Calibration Restore Input x 1 to 3 Modbus dear Calibration Input 1 0 i Restores original Input 2 1 factory calibration nput 3 2 values v NOTE Press the Information Key for more task related tips 9 8 Calibration Watlow Series FAS D 10 Chapter Ten Diagnostics Overview Diagnostic Menu parameters on the Factory Page provide information about the controller unit that is useful in troubleshooting For example the M od el parameter will identify the 12 digit Series F4 part number The Out1A parameter will identify what type of output has been selected for Output 1A Diagnostic Menu Map Model Mfg Date Serial Software Revision Ini In2 In3 Out1A Out1B Out2A Out2B Retransl Retrans2 Inl AtoD In2 AtoD In3 AtoD CJC1 AtoD CJC2 AtoD CJCl Temp CJC2 Temp Line Freq v NOTE To see how all the p
104. B PID 1 to 30000 Hysteresis 1B PID 1 to 30000 d Hysteresis 1B PID 1 to 30000 Hysteresis 1B PID 1 to 30000 d Hysteresis 1B PID 1 to 30000 Hysteresis 2A PID 1 to 30000 d Hysteresis 2A PID 1 to 30000 d Hysteresis 2A PID 1 to 30000 d Hysteresis 2A PID 1 to 30000 d Hysteresis 2A PID 1 to 30000 d Hysteresis 2B PID 1 to 30000 d Hysteresis 2B PID 1 to 30000 Hysteresis 2B PID 1 to 30000 Hysteresis 2B PID 1 to 30000 Hysteresis 2B PID 1 to 30000 d Idle Set Point Channel 1 Power Out Action number Idle Set Point Channel 2 Power Out Action number ependent on decimal setting Set 1 Channel 1 ependent on decimal setting Set 2 Channel 1 ependent on decimal setting Set 3 Channel 1 ependent on decimal setting Set 4 Channel 1 ependent on decimal setting Set 5 Channel 1 ependent on decimal setting Set 6 Channel 2 ependent on decimal setting Set 7 Channel 2 ependent on decimal setting Set 8 Channel 2 ependent on decimal setting Set 9 Channel 2 ependent on decimal setting Set 10 Channel 2 ependent on decimal setting Set 6 Channel 2 ependent on decimal setting Set 7 Channel 2 ependent on decimal setting Set 8 Channel 2 ependent on decimal setting Set 9 Channel 2 ependent on decimal setting Set 10 Channel 2 ependent on decimal setting Input 1 AtoD Diagnostics HHHH _ _ _ _ Input 1 Error Status Input 1
105. Band B IntegralB ResetB DerivativeB RateB Dead Band B Alarm Set Point Menu Alarm 1 Alarm 2 Low Set Point High Set Point Lo Deviation Hi Deviation Watlow Series FAS D Operations 3 15 Notes 3 16 Operations Watlow Series F4S D Chapter Four Profile Programming What is a Ramping Profile 4 2 Step TYPES az ete d ee ER RR petas 4 2 Profile Plan Checklist 0000000 4 3 How to Program a New Profile 4 4 How to Edit a Profile 24 4 6 User Profile Record 00055 4 7 A Sample Application 00000 4 8 Frequently Asked Questions 4 10 Profiles Page Map 0 0 cee eae 4 11 Profiles Page Parameter Table 4 12 Overview This chapter explains how to program a ramp and soak profile so that it will be stored in the Series F4 memory The first section explains profiles steps and step types The second section explains how to name and program a ramping profile The Series F4 pre sents a sequence of questions that prompt you to define the steps and the step properties While reading this section refer tothe profile already embedded in the Series F 4 software You can use this profile Military Standard Test 810 MILSTD 810D as a template and learn ing tool Thethird section explains how to edit and de
106. Control Output x 1A 1B 2A or 2B Alarm Output x 1 or 2 Retransmit Output x 1 or 2 Digital Output x 1 to 8 and Communications 3 Gotothe Operations Page and tune or set the PID sets 4 Gotothe Operations Page and set the alarm set points 5 Gotothe Profiles Page to program the profiles Customizing the Main Page Up to 16 lines can be added to the Main Page to display status and information from the controller Gotothe Setup Main Page menu on the Setup Page The first screen will prompt you to choose one of the 16 lines to customize P1 Parameter is the first line P16 Parameter is the 16th After choosing this line by pressing select a parame ter to monitor Your choices are Active Ch1 PID Set Active Ch2 PID Set Last J ump Step e J ump Count e WaitF or Status Step Type Target SP1 Target SP2 Inner Set Point Custom Message 1 None Input 1 Value Input 2 Value Input 3 Value Set Point 1 Set Point 2 96 Power 1 96 Power 2 Tune Status 1 Tune Status 2 Time Custom Message 2 Date Custom Message 3 Digital Ins Custom Message 4 Digital Outs Input 1 Cal Offset Time Remaining Input 2 Cal Offset Current File Input 3 Cal Offset Current Step When a digital input or output is active its number will appear in the Main Page display when it is inactive its position will be underlined When a Wait for condition is
107. Lock 503 Derivative 1A PID Set 1 Channel 1 2 Reset Alarm r w 000 to 999 expressed in hundredths of minutes 3 Control Outputs Off 513 Derivative 1A PID Set 2 Channel 1 4 All Outputs Off r w 000 to 999 expressed in hundredths of minutes 5 Digital Outputs Off 523 Derivative 1A PID Set 3 Channel 1 6 Start Profile r w 000 to 999 expressed in hundredths of minutes 7 Pause Profile 533 Derivative 1A PID Set 4 Channel 1 8 Resume Profile rw 000 to 999 expressed in hundredths of minutes 9 Terminate Profile 10 Wait For Event 7 4 Communications Watlow Series F4S D 1077 Digital Input 2 Start Profile rw 1 to 40 1078 Digital Input 2 Start Step r w 1 to 256 225 Digital Input 3 Status 0 Low 1 High 1065 Digital Input 3 Condition r w 0 Low 1 High 1064 Digital Input 3 Function r w Off Panel Lock Reset Alarm Control Outputs Off All Outputs Off Digital Outputs Off Start Profile Pause Profile Resume Profile Terminate Profile 10 Wait For Event 1079 Digital Input 3 Start Profile oO co 10 014 Co0n2 Cc rw 1 to 40 1080 Digital Input 3 Start Step rw 1 to 256 237 Digital Input 4 Status 0 Low 1 High 1067 Digital Input 4 Condition rw 0 Low 1 High 1066 Digital Input 4 Function rw Off 0 1 Panel Lock 2 Reset Alarm 3 Control Outputs Off 4 All Outputs Off 5 Digital Outputs Off 6 Start Profile 7 Pause Profile 8 Resume Profile 9 Terminate Profile 10 Wait For Event 1081 Digital Input 4 Start Profile
108. Loop Detect Open loop checks the integrity of the control loop consisting of the controller output power control heater and sensor If the output power is at its maximum for a period of time equal to the reset time and the input has not changed at least 5 F the controller will switch to Manual Mode at 0 output power The upper screen will display oPL P and the lower screen will display Open Loop To dear an open loop error after correcting the problem that caused it turn the controller off then back on Location in software Setup Page gt System 6 2 Features Watlow Series FAS D Set Point Low Limit and High Limit The controller constrains the set point to a value between a low limit and a high limit The high lim it cannot be set higher than the sensor high limit or lower than the low limit The low limit cannot be set lower than the sensor low limit or higher than the high limit You can view or change the input low limit SP Low Limit and the input high limit SP High Limit for analog inputs 1 2 or 3 Location in software Setup Page gt Analog Input x 1 to 3 High Scale and Low Scale When an analog input is selected as a process in put you must choose a value to represent the low and high ends of the current or voltage range For example if an analog input with a process sensor type 4 to 20mA is selected and the units are Rel ative Humidity then 096 could represent 4mA and 100 could represent 2
109. M Glaze 8 HOLD When the alarm occurred Andy put the profile on hold while he corrected the Alarm Set Points e mele PyOTUleGs nTn Don t Hold gt Hold Terminate MILSTD810D Holding D Step 1 Remains 00 01 40 RESUME After dearing the alarm Andy entered the com mand to resume the profile e Resume Profile Continue Holding gt Resume Terminate Watlow Series F4S D Operations 3 7 Troubleshooting Alarms and Errors Indication Probable Cause s Corrective Action Power Displays are dead Power to unit may be off Check switches fuses breakers interlocks Fuse may be blown limits connectors etc for energized condi Breaker may be tripped tions and proper connection Safety Interlock door switch etc may be activated Separate system limit control may be latched Wiring may be open Input power may be incorrect Measure power upstream for required level Check part number for input power required Check wire size Check for bad connections Communications Unit will not e Address parameter may be incorrectly set Check Communications Setup Menu and set communi cate to correct address Baud rate parameter may be incorrectly Check Communications Setup Menu and set set to correct baud rate e Unit to unit daisy chain may be disconnect e Look for a break in the daisy chain ed Communications wiring may be reversed Verify correct connections a
110. O Set Ch Parameters to Appear Rate x A or B 0 00 to 9 99 minutes 0 00 minutes 1A 1B Se Activeif PID Units Setup Page Set theratetime 0 to 999 0 ET bl is set to U S and Proportional 524 574 3 Band is not set to 0 534 584 4 544 594 5 r w Dead Band x A or B 0 to 30000 0 1A 1B S amp Active if Proportional Band is not Define the effective 0 to 30000 0 ee E set to 0 and one output is set to shift in the heating 525 575 3 a and Ws other to cool i 535 585 4 Setup Page and cooling set BE ee p Fag points to prevent r w conflict Hysteresis x A or B 1to 30000 3 3 1A 1B Se Activeif Proportional Band is set Define the process _ 1 to 30000 EUR E to 0 and one channel is set to variable change from 527 577 3 Neat and the other to cool the set point re 537 587 4 Setup Page 547 597 5 quired to re energize ENN the output in on off mode PID Set x 6 to 10 Main gt Operations gt Edit PID gt PID Set Channel 2 gt PID Set x 6 to 10 Proportional Band x A or B 0 to 30000 25 F 25 2A 2B Se Active Always Channel 1 o 2500 2550 6 Set the proportional 1 to 30000 14 C 14 2510 2560 7 band 2520 2570 8 2530 2580 9 2540 2590 10 r w Integral x A or B 0 00 to 99 99 minutes 0 minutes 2A 2B Se Activeif PID Units Setup Page Set the integral time 0 to 9999 0 aed 2 i is set to SI and Proportional in minutes 2521 2571 8 Band is not se to 0 2531 2581 9 2541 25
111. PID parameters and select alarm set points Go to Profiles Create edit delete and rename profiles Go to Setup Set up inputs and outputs configure the system and design the Main Page Go to Factory Set security settings and calibrate and re store factory settings Default Current File Current Step Input 2 value Set Point 1 Set Point 2 Step Type Target SP1 Target SP2 Wait for Status Time Remaining Digital Ins Digital Outs 96 Power 1 Power 2 Date Time Modbus Register read write I O Set Ch Conditions for Parameters to Appear Digital outputs configured as events can be turned on off in the static set point mode or when a running profile is on hold The event output status will remain as set until reset by the profile or by the operator 2 8 Keys Displays and Navigation Watlow Series F4S D Chapter Three Operations Static Set Point Control 0000 3 1 Profile Control 0 0 00 ehua PERE eh 3 2 Alarm Set Points 0 0 00 cece ene eee 3 4 Clearing Alarms and Errors 0000 3 4 Auto tune PID y Porma ree i ie 0c eee eee 3 4 Edit PIDY 53 deseos s ba cantautor Sethe 3 4 Multiple PID Sets sslslslssslssessnne 3 5 C dSCades no as Reo ERI Ee UR t 3 6 Sample Application lessen 3 7 Troubleshooting Alarms and Errors 3 8 Operations Page Map sselssssse 3 10 Operations Page Parameter Table
112. Page Finally he went to the Operations Page and set the ac tive alarm band 20 F 20 F Watlow Series F4S D Setup 5 5 Setup Page Map System Guar Soak Bandl Guar Soak Band2 Current Time Current Date PID Units F or 9C Show F or C Chl Autotune SP Ch2 Autotune SP Input 1 Fail Input 2 Fail Open Loop Chl Open Loop Ch2 Power Out Time Power Out Action Analog Input x 1 to 3 Sensor Type Units Decimal Scale Low Scale High Choose Scaling Ch2 Output Disable Enter Inl Temp Low Enter Inl Temp High SP Low Limit SP High Limit Calibration Offset Filter Time Error Latch Cascade Digital Input x 1 to 4 Name Function Condition Control Output x 1A 1B 2A or 2B Function Cycle Time Process Hi Power Limit Lo Power Limit Alarm Output x 1 and 2 Name Alarm Type Alarm Source Latching Silencing Alarm Hysteresis Alarm Sides Alarm Logic Alarm Messages Retransmit Output x 1 and 2 Retransmit Source Analog Range Low Scale High Scale Scale Offset Digital Output x 1 to 8 Name Function Off Event Output Complementary Output Output 5 only Control Output Boost Heat Output 6 only Boost Power Boost Delay Time Boost Cool Output 7 only Boost Power Boost Delay Time Compressor Output 8 only Compressor On Power Compressor Off Power Compressor On Delay Compressor Off Delay Communications Baud Rate Address Custom Main Page Px Parameter 1 to 16 Process Display Input 1 only
113. Point 1 or 2 oe Active if controller is Dual Set percent of set T 2 Channel 2 point to auto tune to Input x Fail 1 or 2 Oto10096 Heatonly 0 0 Fail Active Always 1 Enter percent of 0 to 100 Cool only 903 1 Active if controller is Dual power supplied to odi Ay a 906 2 Channel 2 the output if analog el ai BE TW input sensor fails eat Coo Open Loop Channel x 1 or 2 Off 0 Off 0 Channel Select whether to On 1 Eo n 2 turn off outputs and rA display an error message Power Out Time 0 to 30000 seconds 10 seconds 1213 r w Define a power out 0 to 30000 10 age in seconds Power Out Action Continue 0 Continue 0 1206 r w Active Always Hold 1 Choose controller re E Terminate 2 sponse to power out Reset 3 age while running a Idle Set Point 1 4 profile Idle Set Point 2 5 v NOTE For more information about how parameter settings affect the con troller s operation see the Features Chapter Watlow Series F4S D Setup 5 7 Setup Page Parameter Table Modbus Register Range read write Conditions for Parameter Description Modbus Value Default I O Set Ch Parameters to Appear Analog Input x 1 to 3 Main gt Setup gt Analog Input x 1 to 3 Sensor Thermocouple 0 Thermo Input Active Always RTD 1 couple 0 600 1 Select the sensor Praes 610 2 We Bulb Dry Bulb 3 FA 3 Off 4 Type If Sensor is set to J 0 Input Active Always Select thelineariza thermocou
114. Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps 0 Off 1 On Event Output 3 Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps 0 Off 1 On Event Output 4 Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps 0 Off 1 On Event Output 5 Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps 0 Off 1 On Event Output 6 Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps 0 Off 1 On Event Output 7 Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps 0 Off 1 On Event Output 8 Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps 0 Off 1 On Guaranteed Soak Channel 1 Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps 0 No 1 Yes Guaranteed Soak Channel 2 Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps 0 No 1 Yes Hold a Profile Key Press Simulation 1 Hold Hours Remaining Ramp Time or Soak Step Current Profile Status 0 to 23 Insert Step see Edit Profile Action Jump Count Current Profile Status 1 to 999 Jump Profile Current Profile Status 0 to 40 Jump Repeats Jump Step 1 to 999 Jump Step Current Profile Status 1 256 Jump to Profile Jump Step 1 to 40 Jump to Step Jump Step to 256 Minutes Remaining Ramp Time or Soak Step Current Profile Status 0 to 59 Name Profile 1 10 characters ASCII equivalent decimal code see Modbus Naming Flowchart Name Profile 2 10 characters ASCII equivalent decimal code see Modbus Naming Flowchart Name Profile 3 10 characters ASCII equivalent decimal code see Modbus Naming Flowchart Name Profile 4 10 characters ASCII equivalent decimal code see Modbus Naming Flowchart Name
115. Ramp Time or Soak Steps Wait For Event 2 Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps Wait For Event 3 Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps Wait For Event 4 Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps Wait For Analog 1 Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps Wait For Analog 1 Value Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps Wait For Analog 2 Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps Wait For Analog 2 Value Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps Wait For Analog 3 Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps Wait For Analog 3 Value Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps Event Output 1 Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps Event Output 2 Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps Event Output 3 Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps Event Output 4 Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps Event Output 5 Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps Event Output 6 Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps Event Output 7 Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps Event Output 8 Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps Rate Ramp Rate Step Ramp Setpoint Channel 1 Ramp Rate or Ramp Time Step Ramp Setpoint Channel 2 Ramp Time Step Channel 1 PID Set Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps Channel 2 PID Set Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps Guaranteed Soak Channel 1 Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps Guaranteed Soak Channel 2 Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps Jump to Profile Jump Step Jump to Step Jump Step Jump Repeats Jump Step End Action End Ste
116. Series F4S D User s Manual 96mm x 96mm Ramping Controller 1 4 DIN with Guided Setup and Programming CE TOTAL CUSTOMER SATISFACTION 3YearWarranty MEM M 1241 Bundy Boulevard Winona Minnesota USA Phone 1 507 454 5300 Fax 1 507 452 4507 http www watlow com 0600 0032 0000 Rev G NA AAA April 2004 15 00 TOTAL CUSTOMER SATISFACTION 3YearWarranty About Watlow Winona Watlow Winona is a division of Watlow Electric Mfg Co St Louis Missouri a manufacturer of industrial electric heating products since 1922 Watlow begins with a full set of specifications and completes an indus trial product that is manufactured in house in the U S A Watlow products include electric heaters sensors controllers and switching devices The Winona operation has been designing solid state electronic control devices since 1962 and has earned the reputation as an excellent supplier to original equipment manufac turers These OEMs and end users depend upon Watlow Winona to provide compatibly engineered controls that they can incorporate into their products with confidence Watlow Winona resides in a 100 000 square foot marketing engineering and manufacturing facility in Winona Minnesota About This Manual The Series F 4 User s Manual covers hardware and software in both the Single Channel and Dual Channel controllers Instructions and illustrations pertain to both unless otherwise specified If a giv
117. Set Point Ch2 Read Modbus Register 4123 Monitor Ch1 PID Set Read Modbus Register 4124 Monitor Ch2 PID Set Read Modbus Register 4125 Monitor Last Jump Count Read Modbus Register 4126 Monitor Last Jump File Read Modbus Register 4127 Monitor Jump Step Read Modbus Register 4128 Monitor End Setpoint Ch1 Read Modbus Register 4129 Monitor End Setpoint Ch2 Read Modbus Register 4130 Assumes controller is configured for functions read you can t read a digital output if it doesn t exist Read Modbus Register 4109 4120 Monitor Seconds Remaining Read Modbus Register 4121 Vonitor Profile Waiting Analog Input 3 Read Modbus Register 4110 7 26 Communications Watlow Series F4S D Chapter Eight Security and Locks Overview The Series F4 allows users to set separate security levels for the Static Set Point prompt on the Main Page for all menus on the Operations Page as well as for the Profiles Page Setup Page and Factory Page Four levels of security are available Full Access operators can enter and change settings Read Only operators can read but not change settings Set Lock Levels To set levels of security go to Set Lockout on the Factory Page Press the Right Key This menu lists the menus for which access can be limited Set Point on Main Page Operations Page Autotune PID Operations Page Edit PID Operations Page Alarm Set Point Profiles Page
118. Watlow Series FAS D Chapter Nine Calibration Thermocouple Input Procedure 9 2 RTD Input Procedure 0 e ee eee 9 2 Voltage Process Input Procedure 9 3 Current Process Input Procedure 9 3 Process Output Procedure 05 9 4 Retransmit Output Procedure 9 5 Calibration Menu Map lesse 9 6 Factory Page Parameter Table 9 7 Overview The Calibration Menu on the Factory Page allows calibration of inputs and outputs Calibration pro cedures should be done only by qualified technical personnel with access to the equipment listed in each section Before beginning calibration procedures warm up the controller for at least 20 minutes Restore Factory Values Each controller is calibrated before leaving the factory If at any time you want to restore the factory calibration values use the last parameters in the menu Restore In x 1 to 3 Cal Press No spedial equipment is necessary v NOTE To see how all the pages menus and parameters are grouped refer to the inside back cover of this manual v NOTE For more information about how parameter settings affect the controller s operation see the Features Chapter Watlow Series F4 Calibration 9 1 Calibrating the Series F4 Thermocouple Input Procedure Equipment e TypeJ reference compensator with reference junction at 32 F 0 C or type thermoc
119. a continuaci n para indicar su conformidad 89 336 EEC Directriz de compatibilidad electromagn tica EN 61326 1997 CON A1 1998 Equipo el ctrico para medici n control y uso en laboratorio Requisitos EMC Inmunidad industrial Emisiones Clase A EN 61000 4 2 1996 con A1 1988 Inmunidad a descarga electrost tica EN 61000 4 3 1997 Inmunidad a campo radiado EN 61000 4 4 1995 Inmunidad a incremento repentino r pidas fluctuaciones el ctricas transitorias EN 61000 4 5 1995 con A1 1996 Inmunidad a picos de voltaje o corriente EN 61000 4 6 1996 Inmunidad por conducci n EN 61000 4 11 1994 Inmunidad a ca das de voltaje variaciones y pequefias interrupciones de voltaje EN 61000 3 2 1995 con A1 3 1999 Emisiones de corriente arm nica EN 61000 3 3 1995 con A1 1998 Fluctuaciones de voltaje y centelleo 73 23 EEC Directriz de bajo voltaje EN 61010 1 1993 con A1 1995 Requisitos de seguridad de equipo el ctric para medici n control y uso en laboratorio Parte 1 Requisitos generales Winona Minnesota USA Place of Issue Jim Boigenzahn Name of Authorized Representative September 2001 Date of Issue General Manager Title of Authorized Representative j jj Fg ee Signature of Authdrized Representative Watlow Series F4S D Appendix A 5 Specifications Universal Analog Inputs 1 2 and 3 optional Update rates In1 20Hz In2 and In3 10Hz Thermocouple Type J K T N C W5 E
120. actory Profile Indicator Light Run Hold status a fg Lit when a ramping polle o runs When blinking the profile is um 290000 When not lit the controller operates as a static set point controller Figure 2 2 Series FAS D Displays and Indicator Lights FAD shown Active Output Indicator Lights Output status Lit when the corresponding controller channel output is active FAD shown Alarm Output Indicator Lights Alarm status Lit during an alarm state Communications Indicator Light Communication status Lit pulsates when the con troller sends or receives valid data A Scroll Bar Scroll up or down w Appears when the Up or Down Keys can reveal more information in the Lower Display 2 2 Keys Displays and Navigation Watlow Series FAS D Custom Main Page The first and central page on the Lower Display is the Main Page which shows error messages input output and profile status and allows access to con troller software Go to Operations Profiles Setup and Factory The Main Page can be customized to display cho Main Page Will always appear Input 1 Error if active impute 2 Error input 3 Error Will appear if active Alarm 1 Condition and if set up to appear Alarm 2 Condition Autotuning Ch 1 Autotuning Ch 2 Will appear if active and selected to appear Current File Current Step Input2 Set Point 1 Set Point 2 Step Type Target SP1 Target SP
121. ages menus and parameters are grouped refer to the inside back cover of this manual Select the parameter by pressing the Right Key The information will appear on the Lower Display Some of the parameters in the Diagnostic Menu provide information for factory use only To reset all parameters to their original factory values use the Full Defaults parameter under the Test Menu Test Menu Map Test Outputs Display Test Full Defaults v NOTE For more information about how parameter settings affect the controller s operation see the Features Chapter Watlow Series FAS D Diagnostics 10 1 Diagnostic Menu Parameter Table Factory Page Range Parameter Description Modbus Value Default Diagnostic Main gt Factory gt Diagnostic Model F 4XX XXXX XXXX F 4XX XXXX Identifies the 12 XXXX digit Series F4 part number Mfg Date XXXX 0198 Identifies the manu facture date Serial Number 0 to 999999 0 Identifies the indi vidual controller Software Number 00 to 99 1 Identifies the soft 0 to 99 ware ID number Software Revision 0 00 to 9 99 2 01 201 Identifies the soft 0 to 990 ware revision Int Univ Single 7 Displays the input 1 type In2 Univ Dual 8 Displays the input 2 None 0 type in Univ Dual 8 Displays the input 3 None 0 type OutiA DC 3 Displays the output SSR 2 1A type Process 4 Out1B DC 3 Displays the output SSR 2 1B type Process 4 None 0 Out2A DC 3
122. al Output 7 2594 Rate 2B PID Set 10 Channel 2 1306 Autotune PID Lockout 2070 Digital Output 8 Condition 2595 Dead Band 2B PID Set 10 Channel 2 1307 Edit PID Lockout 2071 Function Digital Output 8 2597 Hysteresis 2B PID Set 10 Channel 2 1308 Alarm Set Point Lockout 2072 Compressor On Power Digital Output 8 2600 Proportional Band 1A Cascade PID Set 1 1309 Profiles Lockout 2073 Compressor Off Power Digital Output 8 Channel 1 1315 Clear Locks 2074 Compressor On Delay Digital Output 8 2601 Integral 1A Cascade PID Set 1 Channel 1 1330 33 Set Password 2075 Compressor Off Delay Digital Output 8 2602Reset 1A Cascade PID Set 1 Channel 1 1400 15 Custom Main Page Parameters P1 to P16 2500 Proportional Band 2A PID Set 6 Channel 2 2603 Derivative 1A Cascade PID Set 1 Channel 1 1500 CJC1 Temp Diagnostics 2501 Integral 2A PID Set 6 Channel 2 2604 Rate 1A Cascade PID Set 1 Channel 1 1501 CJC1 AtoD Diagnostics 2502 Reset 2A PID Set 6 Channel 2 2605 Dead Band 1A Cascade PID Set 1 Channel 1 1504 Input 1 AtoD Diagnostics 2503 Derivative 2A PID Set 6 Channel 2 2607 Hysteresis 1A Cascade PID Set 1 Channel 1 1505 Input 2 AtoD Diagnostics 2504 Rate 2A PID Set 6 Channel 2 2610 Proportional Band 1A Cascade PID Set 2 1506 Input 3 AtoD Diagnostics 2505 Dead Band 2A PID Set 6 Channel 2 Channel 1 1513 Display Test Test 2506 Cycle Time Value Control Output 2A 2611 Integral 1A Cascade PID Set 2 Channel 1 1514 Test Output
123. alue is tuned to bring the temperature or process value closer to the set point Integral determines the speed of the correction but this may increase the overshoot at startup or when the set point is changed Too much integral action will make the system unstable Inte gral is deared when the process value is outside of the proportional band Integral if units are set to SI is measured in min utes per repeat A low integral value causes a fast integrating action Reset rate if units are set to U S is measured in repeats per minute A high reset value causes a fast integrating action Location in software Operations Page Edit PID gt PID Set Channel x 1 or 2 2 PID Set x 1 to 5 or 6 to 10 Proportional Integral Derivative PID Control Use derivative rate control to minimize overshoot in a Pl controlled system Derivative adjusts the output based on the rate of change in the tempera ture or process value Too much derivative will make the system sluggish Location in software Operations Page Edit PID gt PID Set Channel x 1 or 2 2 PID Set x 1 to 5 or 6 to 10 Dead Band In a multiple PID application the dead bands above and below the set point can save an application s energy and wear by maintaining process tempera ture within acceptable ranges Shifting the effective cooling set point and heating set point keeps the two systems from fighting each other Proportional action ceases when the proces
124. amp Rate or Soak Step gt Event Output ad Active if the associated Digital r w Output x 1 to 8 Off 0 Off 0 Select this Digital O D Output to be on or off A WARNING Check the configuration of the controller on the Setup Page be fore starting and running a profile if the Setup Page is not locked Make sure settings are appropriate to the profile If the Setup Page is accessible failure to check the configuration before running a profile could result in damage to equipment and or property and or injury or death to personnel Y NOTE Two sets of Modbus registers contain profile informa tion In edit mode the number of the profile being edited is at 4000 and the number of the step being edited is at 4001 When the profile is running the number of the profile being run is at 4100 and the number of the step being run is at 4101 All run addresses are read only 4111 4031 4112 4032 4113 4033 4114 4034 4115 4035 4116 4036 4117 4037 4118 r r w r r w r r w r r w r r w r r w r r w r 1 Output is set to Event 4 14 Profile Programming Watlow Series F4S D Profiles Page Parameter Table Modbus Register Range read write Conditions for Parameter Description Modbus Value Default VO Set Ch Parameters to Appear PID Set Profile x 1 to 40 Edit Step Step x 1 to 256 Ramp Time or Ramp Rate or Soak Step PID Set Channel 1 PID Set 1 0 PID Set 1 0 4046 r w
125. and 58 of the controller 6 Enter 0 000V from the voltage source to the controller Allow at least 10 seconds to stabilize Press once at the Calibrate Input 2 prompt At the 0 000V prompt press once and to store the 0 000V input press once 7 Enter 10 000V from the voltage source to the controller Allow at least 10 seconds to stabilize Press once at the Calibrate Input 2 prompt Factory Page At the 10 000V prompt press once and to store the 10 000V input press O once Input 3 8 Connect the voltage source to terminals 51 and 56 of the controller 9 Enter 0 000V from the voltage source to the controller Allow at least 10 seconds to stabilize Press once at the Calibrate Input 3 prompt At the 0 000V prompt press once and to store the 0 000V input press once 10 Enter 10 000V from the voltage source to the controller Allow at least 10 seconds to stabilize Press onceat the Calibrate Input 3 prompt Factory Page At the 10 000V prompt press once and to store the 10 000V input press O once 11 Rewire for operation and verify calibration Current Process Input Procedure Equipment e Precision current source 0 to 20mA range with 0 01mA resolution Input x 1 to 3 Setup and Calibration 1 Connect the correct power supply to terminals 1 2 and 3 see the Wiring Chapter and the Appendix Input 1 2 Connect the current source to terminals 60 and 62 3
126. aranteed Soak Band Channel 1 2021 Function Digital Output 3 2575 Dead Band 2B PID Set 8 Channel 2 1206 Power Out Action 2030 Digital Output 4 Condition 2577 Hysteresis 2B PID Set 8 Channel 2 1209 Resume a Profile Key Press Simulation 2031 Function Digital Output 4 2580 Proportional Band 2B PID Set 9 Channel 2 1210 Hold a Profile Key Press Simulation 2040 Digital Output 5 Condition 2581 Integral 2B PID Set 9 Channel 2 1212 Guaranteed Soak Band Channel 2 2041 Function Digital Output 5 2582 Reset 2B PID Set 9 Channel 2 1213 Power Out Time 2046 Complementary Output Digital Output 5 2583 Derivative 2B PID Set 9 Channel 2 1217 Terminate a Profile Key Press Simulation 2050 Digital Output 6 Condition 2584 Rate 2B PID Set 9 Channel 2 1218 Profiles Remaining 2051 Function Digital Output 6 2585 Dead Band 2B PID Set 9 Channel 2 1219 Profile Steps Remaining 2052 Boost Heat Power Digital Output 6 2587 Hysteresis 2B PID Set 9 Channel 2 1220 Guaranteed Soak Band 1 Source 2054 Boost Heat Delay On Time Digital Output 6 2590 Proportional Band 2B PID Set 10 Channel 2 1221 Guaranteed Soak Band 2 Source 2060 Digital Output 7 Condition 2591 Integral 2B PID Set 10 Channel 2 1300 Set Point Lockout 2061 Function Digital Output 7 2592 Reset 2B PID Set 10 Channel 2 1302 Setup Page Lockout 2062 Boost Cool Power Digital Output 7 2593 Derivative 2B PID Set 10 Channel 2 1303 Factory Page Lockout 2064 Boost Cool Delay On Time Digit
127. ard protocol developed y A E G Schneider Modbus RTU enables a com puter or PLC to read and write directly to registers containing the controller s parameters With it you can read all of the controller s parameters with a few read commands If you already have a software application that us es Modbus the Modbus Registers Table in this chapter will provide the register number and val ues sometimes called enumerated types for each parameter Exception Responses Dependencies between parameters do exist F or best results program the parameters in the order in which they appear in the Software Map inside back cover To program a profile using M odbus refer to the Profiling Flow Charts in this chapter For basic information about writing an application using Modbus protocol you may want to download the electronic Watlow Controls Data Communica tions Guide from the Watlow web site http www watlow com prodtechinfo Search on data communications reference When a controller cannot process a command it returns an exception response and sets the high bit 0x80 of the command 0x01 illegal command 0x02 illegal data address 0x03 illegal data value Packet returned by controller nn nn nn nn nn controller address one E A A A command 0x80 excepti on code 0x01 or 0x02 or 0x03 CRC low byte CRC high byte v NOTE For ranges conditions and other informatio
128. ated by the auto tuning feature 4 To manually tune the outer loop go to the Edit PID Menu Operations Page Choose Cascade Outer Loop then choose Outer Loop PID set 1 to 5 Begin manual tuning by setting the Propor tional Band to 5 Integral Reset to 0 and Rate to 0 Establish the desired set point and let the system stabilize When the system stabilizes watch the Inner Loop Set Point on the Main Page If this value fluctuates increase the pro portional band until it stabilizes Adjust the pro portional band in 3 to 5 increments allowing time for the system to stabilize between adjust ments 5 When Input 1 has stabilized watch the percent power on the Main Page It should be stable 2 At this point the process temperature should also be stable but it will exhibit droop stabilized below set point The droop can be eliminated with Integral reset 6 Start with an integral setting of 99 9 minutes and allow 10 minutes for the process tempera ture to come up to set point If it has not decrease the setting by half and wait another 10 minutes Then halve the setting again and wait another 10 minutes until the process value equals the set point If the process becomes unstable the integral value is too small Increase it until the process stabilizes 3 6 Operations Watlow Series FAS D Sample Application Environmental Testing Running a Profile Andy an engineer with the Aj
129. atic reset The integral funcion of a PI or PID temperature controller that adjusts the pro cess temperature to the set point after the system stabilizes The inverse of integral automatic power reset A feature in latching limit controls that does not recognize power outage as a limit condition When power is restored the output is re energized automatically as long as the temperature is within limits manual reset 1 A featureona limit control that requires human intervention to return the limit to nor mal operation after a limit condition has occurred 2 The adjustment of a proportional control to raise the proportional band to compensate for droop resistance temperature detector RTD A sensor that uses the resistance temperature charac teristic to measure temperature There are two ba sic types of RTDs the wire RTD which is usually made of platinum and the thermistor which is made of a semiconductor material The wire RTD is a positive temperature coefficient sensor only while the thermistor can have either a negative or posi tive temperature coefficient RFI See radio frequency interference RTD See resistance temperature detector serial communications A method of transmit ting information between devices by sending all bits serially over a single communication channel set point The desired value programmed into a controller For example the temperature at which a system is to be
130. ax Testing Company is running temperature and humidity tests on navigational equipment He runs the test profile Military Standard Test 810D having already set up the controller and programmed the profile In Step 4 the temperature in the chamber exceed ed the Alarm 1 setting This triggered the alarm causing the indicator light on the front panel next to the bell shaped icon to light up and a message to appear on the lower display TEMP DEV High Because Alarm 1 was set up as a latching alarm Setup Page Andy had to dear it manually First he corrected the alarm condition by widening the gap between low and high deviation alarm set tings on the Operations Page He then unlatched the alarm by returning to the Main Page alarm line and pressing the Right Key Q again If your Series F4 is a single channel controller you will see only the temperature on Channel 1 This is not the true Military Standard Test 810D v NOTE This profile is embedded in the Series F4 as a teaching tool and a template Go to the Edit Profile Menu Pro files Page and look for MILSTDS10D RUN Andy presses the Profile Key moves the cursor to MILSTD810D on the Run Profile Menu then presses the Right Key o He wants to begin at Step 1 so he presses to select that step The Profile Status Message on the Lower Display now says MILSTD810D Running Step 1 Re mains XX XX e Start Profile SKILSTOSIOD osccaccac ALUMINU
131. circuit held at a stable known temperature cold junction Standard reference temperature is 32 F 0 C LCD See liquid crystal display LED See light emitting diode light emitting diode LED A solid state elec tronic device that glows when electric current pass es through it liquid crystal display LCD A type of digital display made of a material that changes reflectance or transmittance when an electrical field is applied toit limit or limit controller A highly reliable dis crete safety device redundant to the primary con troller that monitors and limits the temperature of the process or a point in the process When tem perature exceeds or falls below the limit set point the limit controller interrupts power through the load circuit A limit controller can protect equip ment and people when it is correctly installed with its own power supply power lines switch and sen Sor manual mode A selectable mode that has no automatic control aspects The operator sets output levels Modbus A digital communications protocol owned by AEG Schneider Automation for industrial computer networks Modbus RTU Remote Terminal Unit an indi vidual Modbus capable device on a network NEMA 4X A NEMA National Electrical Manu facturer s Association specification for determining resistance to moisture infiltration This rating cer tifies the controller as washable and corrosion re s
132. d re enter the chosen menu or page and select Password Security Record your password and keep it secure Use a Password To enter a password protected area users must enter the password If an incorrect password is entered a pop up message will tell you it is invalid and you may try again When the password is correct choose again to enter the menu or page of your choice Change a Password The Change Password parameter is near the end of the list under Set Lockout on the Factory Page To change a password you must first enter the old password for confirmation Set Lockout Menu Map Set Point Oper Autotune PID Oper Edit PID Oper Alarm SP Profile Setup Factory Change Password Clear Locks Must have password O before choosing the password lock BERR EERE RR Must reset lock after setting the password MM M Press any key Enter New Password AY Adjusts Char 4 Save Changes Confirm Password AY Adjusts Char lt gt Save Changes Invalid Re Enter _ AY Adjusts Char lt gt Save Changes Factory Set Lock _ Q Setup Factory gt Change Password m Enter Password AY Adjusts Char 4 Save Changes 8 2 Security and Locks Watlow Series F4S D Set Lockout Menu Parameter Table Parameter Description Range Modbus Value Set Lockout Main gt Factory gt Set Lock Set Point Set the set point access level Operations Autotune PID Limit access to this menu
133. d Alarm Output 12 8 Digital Outputs x 1 to 8 0008 12 9 Communications Wiring 00 5 12 10 Wiring Example llle 12 12 Wiring Notes merie nanea aeS 12 13 Wiring the Series F4 Wiring options depend on the model number which is printed on the label on the back of the controller The model number codes are explained in the Appendix The labels on the sides and back of the controller contain some basic wiring information Input to Output Isolation The Series F4 uses optical and transformer isolation to provide a barrier to prevent ground loops when using grounded sensors and or peripheral equipment Here is a breakdown of the isolation barriers e Analog input 1 and all the digital inputs and outputs are grouped together e Analog inputs 2 and 3 are grouped together e All the control outputs and retransmit outputs are grouped together Both alarm outputs are grouped together e Communications is isolated from the other inputs and outputs Isolation Blocks There are no electrical connections between these blocks Analog Input 1 Digital Inputs Digital Outputs Analog Input 2 and 3 Control Outputs Retransmit Outputs Communications Alarm Outputs Figure 12 1 Isolation Blocks Watlow Series FAS D Wiring 12 1 AN CAUTION If high voltage is applied to a low voltage unit irreversible damage will occur AN W
134. d only 8 1 security levels 8 1 segment see step self dearing alarm 6 9 self tune see autotune sensor installation guidelines 12 2 accuracy ranges A 6 process input wiring 12 3 12 5 RTD input wiring 12 3 12 5 thermocouple input wiring 12 3 12 5 Sensor Analog Input x 5 8 serial number diagnostics 10 2 Set Lockout Menu map 8 2 Set Point Channel x ramp or soak 4 13 High Limit 5 10 6 3 Lockout 8 1 Low Limit 5 9 6 3 set point autotuning 3 4 set point beginning percentage 3 4 set points cooling dead band 3 5 set points heating dead band 3 5 set variable see setpoint setting and changing password 8 2 setting lock levels 8 1 Clear Locks 8 3 Factory Page 8 1 Operations 8 1 Password 8 2 8 3 Profile Page 8 1 Set Point 8 1 Setup Page 8 1 settings 2 5 change 2 5 program 2 5 set up 2 5 setup steps 1 4 Setup overview 5 1 customizing the Main Page 5 2 parameter record 5 16 parameter setup order 5 1 parameter table 5 7 5 15 sample application 5 4 5 5 setup guidelines 5 1 Setup Page Map 5 6 Show F or C 5 7 silence alarm 5 12 6 9 Silencing Alarm Output x 5 12 single channel 1 1 Soak Step 4 3 Soak Step Time 4 13 software map A 16 A 17 Software Number 10 2 software page and menu maps Calibration Menu 9 6 Diagnostics Menu 10 2 Operations Page 3 10 Profiles Page 4 11 Set Lockout Menu 8 2 Setup Page 5 6 solenoid valve 5 4 solid state relay 5 4 12 7 SP High Limit 5 10 6 3 SP Low Limit 5 9 6 3 specification
135. de PID Set 5 Channel 1 1624 Retransmit Output 1 4 000mA Calibrate 2542 Reset 2A PID Set 10 Channel 2 2643 Derivative 1A Cascade PID Set 5 Channel 1 1625 Retransmit Output 1 20 000mA Calibrate 2543 Derivative 2A PID Set 10 Channel 2 2644 Rate 1A Cascade PID Set 5 Channel 1 1626 Retransmit Output 1 1 000V Calibrate 2544 Rate 2A PID Set 10 Channel 2 2645 Dead Band 1A Cascade PID Set 5 Channel 1 1627 Retransmit Output 1 10 000V Calibrate 2545 Dead Band 2A PID Set 10 Channel 2 2647 Hysteresis 1A Cascade PID Set 5 Channel 1 1629 Retransmit Output 2 4 000mA Calibrate 2547 Hysteresis 2A PID Set 10 Channel 2 2650 Proportional Band 1B Cascade PID Set 1 1630 Retransmit Output 2 20 000mA Calibrate 2550 Proportional Band 2B PID Set 6 Channel 2 Channel 1 1631 Retransmit Output 2 1 000V Calibrate 2551 Integral 2B PID Set 6 Channel 2 2651 Integral 1B Cascade PID Set 1 Channel 1 1632 Retransmit Output 2 10 000V Calibrate 2552 Reset 2B PID Set 6 Channel 2 2652 Reset 1B Cascade PID Set 1 Channel 1 1902 Altitude Analog Input 2 2553 Derivative 2B PID Set 6 Channel 2 2653 Derivative 1B Cascade PID Set 1 Channel 1 1915 Cascade Analog Input 3 2554 Rate 2B PID Set 6 Channel 2 2654 Rate 1B Cascade PID Set 1 Channel 1 1916 Current Time Hour 2555 Dead Band 2B PID Set 6 Channel 2 2655 Dead Band 1B Cascade PID Set 1 Channel 1 1917 Current Time Minutes 2556 Cycle Time Value Control Output 2B 2657 Hysteresis 1B Cascade
136. de optimal control PID values can be auto tuned or adjusted manually When au totuning is complete the PID values will be stored in the Edit PID Menu v NOTE PID Set 1 for Channel 1 and PID Set 6 for Channel 2 are used in the Static Set Point mode Autotuning Procedure Autotuning cannot be initiated while a profile is running It can only be initiated in the static set point control mode 1 Before initiating auto tune goto the System Menu Setup Page and set the Channel 1 or 2 Autotune Set Point to the percentage of set point you choose to begin with This percentage is based on your knowledge of the system and how much overshoot or undershoot there is likely to be in on off control In the Custom Main Page select to display Tune Status 1 and Tune Status 2 This displays Tune Status in the Main Page 2 Gotothe Main Page and set the static set point 3 Gotothe Autotune PID Menu Operations Page and choose the channel to auto tune and the PID set in which to store the settings A message will be displayed on the Main Page during the auto tuning process Auto tune cannot be initiated when a profile is running It can only be initiated in the static set point mode 4 When autotuning is complete the controller will store the values for optimum control in the PID set specified v NOTE While the controller is autotuning profiles cannot be run and only the Profiles Page and Operation Page of the software can be
137. ding on the mod el and configuration of the controller 3 10 Operations Watlow Series FAS D Operations Page Parameter Table Range Parameter Description Modbus Value Autotune PID Main gt Operations gt Autotune PID Channel x 1 to 2 Autotune Tune Off 0 Select whether PID Cyt pip eat 2 0 parameters will be Ch1 PID Set 3 3 automatically Ch1 PID Set 4 4 selected Ch1 PID Set 5 5 Ch2 PID Set 6 1 Ch2 PID Set 7 2 Ch2 PID Set 8 3 Ch2 PID Set 9 4 Ch2 PID Set 10 5 Autotune PID Cascade Main gt Operations gt Autotune PID gt Cascade Tune Off 0 Inner Loop PID Set 1 Inner Loop PID Set 2 Inner Loop PID Set 3 Inner Loop PID Set 4 Inner Loop PID Set 5 Cascade Inner Loop Select which PID pa rameters will be au tomatically tuned Tune Off 0 Outer Loop PID Set 1 Outer Loop PID Set 2 Outer Loop PID Set 3 Outer Loop PID Set 4 Outer Loop PID Set 5 Edit PID Main gt Operations gt Edit PID Cascade Outer Loop Select which PID pa rameters will be au tomatically tuned Main gt Operations gt Edit PID gt PID Set Channel 1 Proportional Band x A or B 0 to 30000 Define the propor Oto 30000 tional band for PID control Integral x A or B 0 00 to 300 00 minutes Set the integral time 0 to 30000 in minutes Reset x A or B Set the reset time in repeats per minute 0 00 per minute to 99 99 per minute 0 to 9999 0 00 to 9 99 minutes 0 to 999 D
138. e 1A Cascade PID Set 1 Channel 1 000 to 999 expressed in hundredths of minutes Rate 1A Cascade PID Set 2 Channel 1 000 to 999 expressed in hundredths of minutes Rate 1A Cascade PID Set 3 Channel 1 000 to 999 expressed in hundredths of minutes Rate 1A Cascade PID Set 4 Channel 1 000 to 999 expressed in hundredths of minutes Rate 1A Cascade PID Set 5 Channel 1 000 to 999 expressed in hundredths of minutes Rate 1A PID Set 1 Channel 1 000 to 999 expressed in hundredths of minutes Rate 1A PID Set 2 Channel 1 000 to 999 expressed in hundredths of minutes Rate 1A PID Set 3 Channel 1 000 to 999 expressed in hundredths of minutes Rate 1A PID Set 4 Channel 1 000 to 999 expressed in hundredths of minutes Rate 1A PID Set 5 Channel 1 000 to 999 expressed in hundredths of minutes Rate 1B Cascade PID Set 1 Channel 1 000 to 999 expressed in hundredths of minutes Rate 1B Cascade PID Set 2 Channel 1 000 to 999 expressed in hundredths of minutes Rate 1B Cascade PID Set 3 Channel 1 000 to 999 expressed in hundredths of minutes Rate 1B Cascade PID Set 4 Channel 1 000 to 999 expressed in hundredths of minutes Rate 1B Cascade PID Set 5 Channel 1 000 to 999 expressed in hundredths of minutes Rate 1B PID Set 1 Channel 1 000 to 999 expressed in hundredths of minutes Rate 1B PID Set 2 Channel 1 000 to 999 expressed in hundredths of minutes 7 8 Communications Watlow Series F
139. e Soak Band x 5 7 Guarantee Soak ramp rate or ramp time or soak steps 4 13 guided setup and programming 2 5 H High Power Limit 5 6 5 11 High Scale 5 13 6 3 Hold 3 3 4 5 hold profile 3 3 holdback see guaranteed soak hours remaining ramp time or soak step current profile status 4 13 Hysteresis 6 4 boost heat amp cool 6 10 Cascade Inner Loop 3 12 Cascade Outer Loop 3 14 PID Set 1to5 3 12 PID Set 6 to 10 3 13 I i key 1 4 2 4 2 7 Idle 4 5 Idle Set Point 4 5 4 16 Idle Set Point Channel x power out Watlow Series FAS D Appendix A 9 action 5 7 indicator lights 2 2 Information Key 1 4 2 4 2 7 Input 1 Only Process Display 5 15 Input 1 wiring 12 3 Input 2 wiring 12 4 12 5 Input 3 wiring 12 4 12 5 input calibration 9 2 9 4 input errors 3 9 input status 2 8 input wiring 12 3 12 5 Input x Error 2 8 Input x Failure 5 7 input to output isolation 12 1 inputs and outputs 1 1 calibration 9 2 9 6 dual channel Series F4 1 1 single channel Series F4 1 1 wiring overview 12 1 12 2 insert step 4 6 installation dimensions 11 1 installing 11 2 overview 11 2 11 3 tools required 11 2 Integral Reset Adjustment 3 5 Integral x Cascade Inner Loop 3 11 Cascade Outer Loop 3 13 PID Set 1to5 3 11 PID Set 6to 10 3 12 Internal Cascade SP 6 11 isolation barriers 12 1 J J ump Count 4 15 Profile 4 15 Repeats 4 15 Step 4 13 4 15 K keys Information Key 1 4 2 4 2 7 Left and Right Keys 2 4 A 17 ProfileKey
140. e aes A 16 A downloadable electronic copy of this user manual is available free of charge through Watlow s web site http www watlow com prodtechinfo Search on Series F4 Watlow Series F4S D Table of Contents A Safety Alert CAUTION or WARNING A Electrical Shock Hazard CAUTION or WARNING Safety Information in this Manual Note caution and warning symbols appear throughout this book to draw your attention to important operational and safety information A NOTE marks a short message to alert you to an important detail A CAUTION safety alert appears with information that is important for protecting your equipment and performance A WARNING safety alert appears with information that is important for protecting you others and equipment from damage Pay very close attention to all warnings that apply to your application The A symbol an exclamation point in a triangle precedes a general CAUTION or WARNING statement The A symbol a lightning bolt in a lightning bolt in a triangle precedes an electric shock hazard CAUTION or WARNING safety statement Technical Assistance f you encounter a problem with your Watlow controller review all configuration information to verify that your selections are consistent with your application inputs outputs alarms limits etc If the problem persists after checking the above you can get technical assistance by calling your local Watlow represen
141. e alarm set point band Alarm set points are determined in the Operations Page Before programming the profile to run the temperature and hu midity tests in the environmen tal chamber Andy had to con figure the controller to suit the equipment and the test He went to the Setup Page System Menu and established the global system parameters induding the real time dock the date and the PID units Then he continued through the list of inputs and outputs con figuring each and keeping notes about his settings on the User Setup Chart To enter press the Right Key Q To exit press the Left Key repeatedly O Use a copy of the chart at the end of this chapter to record your settings Sensor RTD Type DIN Decimal Point 0 0 Set Point Low 32 0 F Retransmit Output 1 Totrack the temperature of the equipment inside the chamber Andy configured a retransmit out put to match input 3 He scrolled down the list of inputs and outputs on the Setup Page and found Re transmit Output He chose 50 and 150 F respectively for the Scale Low and Scale High the smaller the range the higher the resolution on the chart Source Input 3 Current 4 20mA Scale Low 50 F Scale High 150 F Scale Offset 0 F Digital Output 7 Set Point High 450 0 F No Calibration Offset O second Filter Self Clearing Error Control Output x 1A 1B 2A 2B Next he scrolled back up to set the control outputs con
142. e or Soak Step Current Profile Status 3820 29 Name Profile 33 10 characters r 0 to 59 3830 39 Name Profile 34 10 characters 4121 Seconds Remaining Ramp Time or Soak Step Current Profile Status 3840 49 Name Profile 35 10 characters r 0 to 59 3850 59 Name Profile 36 10 characters 4122 Set Point Ch 1 Ramp Rate Ramp Time or Soak Step Current Profile Status 3860 69 Name Profile 37 10 characters r Range low to range high 3870 79 Name Profile 38 10 characters 4123 Set Point Ch 2 Ramp Rate Ramp Time or Soak Step Current Profile Status 3880 89 Name Profile 39 10 characters r Range low to range high 3890 99 Name Profile 40 10 characters 4009 Soak Step Time hours Profile Edit Action see Edit Profile Action r w 0 to 99 4000 Profile Number 4010 Soak Step Time minutes 4100 Profile Number Current Status r w 0059 4103 Profile Ramp Waiting Current Status 4011 Soak Step Time seconds 1218 Profiles Remaining rw 0059 r 0 40 1217 Terminate a Profile Key Press Simulation 4001 Profile Step Number w 1 Terminate 4101 Profile Step Number Current Status 4021 Wait For Analog 1 Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps 1219 Profile Steps Remaining r w 0 Don t Wait r 0 256 1 Wait 4003 Profile Step Type _ 4022 Wait For Analog 1 Value Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps r w 1 Ramp Time r w Range Low to Range High 2 Ramp Rate 4023 Wait For Analog 2 Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps 3 Soak rw 0 Dont Wait 4 Jump 1 Wait 5 End read only
143. e parameter directing you to press or to seethe rest you want to know more about 3 Press again to return to your task Toggle the Information Key WATLOW Fa between the parameter e you need to know about and IL ri C e its functional definition II LII o OA Choose to Setup ____ The second press takes you System ane gt Analog Input 1 Hl back to where you were Analog Input 2 v ane fe indi i Analog Inputl The scroll bar indicates py She ae iiec Inubs more information above or that accept an E 1 i TE d below use the O and O a ee es 29 000 Figure 2 7 The Information Key F4D shown Watlow Series F4S D Keys Displays and Navigation 2 7 Main Page Parameter Table Range Parameter Description Modbus Value Main Page Main gt Setup gt Main Page Input x 1 to 3 Error Alarm x 1 to 2 Condition Autotuning Channel x 1 or 2 Parameter x 1 to 16 None View customized iei NE arameter list P Input 3 Value Set Point 1 Set Point 2 Power 1 Power 2 Tune status 1 Tune status 2 Time Date Digital Ins Digital Outs Time Remaining Current File Current Step Active Ch1 PID Set Active Ch2 PID Set Last J ump Step J ump Count WaitFor Status Step Type Target SP1 Target SP2 Inner Set Point Custom Message 1 Custom Message 2 Custom Message 3 Custom Message 4 Input 1 Cal Offset Input 2 Cal Offset Input 3 Cal Offset Go to Operations Auto tune PID sets edit
144. e the Profile Programming Chapter N WARNING Check the configuration of the controller on the Setup Page before starting and running a profile if the Setup Page is not locked Make sure the settings are appropri ate to the profile input sensor ranges and limits digital inputs and outputs as events guaranteed soak band re sponse to power out and Celsius or Fahrenheit scales If the Setup Page is accessible failure to check the configu ration before running a profile could result in damage to equipment and or property and or injury or death to per sonnel Start a Profile iB v No A Yes TTT TTT TTT TT EE Start Profile MEISTE GNO ss 56566500 ALUMINUM gt Glaze 8 Start Ge Step 1 Autostart gt Step 2 Ramp Time Step 3 Ramp Time Glaze 8 Running Step 2 Remain 00 10 30 v NOTE While a profile is running the controller will not recog nize digital inputs that are programmed to start a profile Such digital inputs will be recognized only while the con troller is in the static set point mode v NOTE While a profile is running profiles can be either created or renamed only while a profile is running All other pages and menus can be entered only during Static Set Point Control mode 3 2 Operations Watlow Series F4S D To Hold a Running Profile 1 Press the Profile Key while running a pro file The Profile Action Menu appears 2 Choose to Don t Hold Hold or Ter
145. econd Repeat until the volt amme ter reads 1 000V Press to store the value 7 Press the Right Key at the Calibrate Out put 1A prompt At the 10 000V prompt press once Use the Up Key O or the Down Key to adjust the display to the reading on the volt ammeter The controller should stabilize within one second Repeat until the volt amme ter reads 10 000V Press to store the value 8 Rewire for operation and verify calibration Output 1B Setup and Calibration 1 Connect the correct power supply to terminals 1 2 and 3 see the Wiring Chapter and the Appendix Milliamperes 2 Connect the volt ammeter to terminals 39 and 40 3 Press theRight Key at the Calibrate Out put 1B prompt At the 4 000mA prompt press once Usethe Up Key O or the Down Key to adjust the display to the reading on the volt ammeter The controller should stabilize within one second Repeat until the volt amme ter reads 4 000mA Press to store the value 4 PresstheRight Key at the Calibrate Out put 1B prompt At the 20 000mA prompt press once UsetheUp Key or the Down Key toadjust the display to the reading on the volt ammeter The controller should stabilize within one second Repeat until the volt amme ter reads 20 000mA Press to store the val ue Volts 5 Connect the volt ammeter to terminals 41 and 40 6 PresstheRight Key at the Calibrate Out put 1B prompt At the 1 000V prom
146. ed dc or solid state relay output options requires use of an R C suppressor Watlow carries the R C suppressor Quencharc brand name which is a trademark of ITW Paktron Watlow Part No 0804 0147 0000 A WARNING To avoid damage to property and equipment and or injury of loss of life use National Electric Code NEC standard wiring practices to install and operate the Series F4 Failure to do so could result in such damage and or injury or death Outputs x 1A 1B 2A and 2B Figure 12 7a Solid state Relay 24V ac minimum 253V ac maximum 0 5 amps off state impedance 31MQ Output 1A Output 1B Output 2A Output 2B doooooo0o0000000 ooo ooo ooo pooocooooooconog Dna Una ooo paonannnannmonng nnmanananannn Bp ooo ooo ooo00000 ooo ooono00000000000 ooo00000 oo00 ooo00000 Figure 12 70 Switched DC Open Collector Switched dc configuration COM not used DC 22 to 28V dc Maximum supply current is 30mA Open collector output DC not used DC 42V dc maximum Off 10mA maximum leakage On 0 2V 90 5 amps sink External Power Switched DC Open Collector dc ED dca Internal Circuitry Internal Circuitry Output 1A Output 1B Output 2A Output 2B ooonoo0000000000 ooo ooo B5 BB ooo ooo nan rmananananannoo ooo ooo ooo rmonunanananano nmpapaagmapann
147. el 1 000 to 9999 expressed in hundredths of minutes Integral 1A Cascade PID Set 5 Channel 1 000 to 9999 expressed in hundredths of minutes Integral 1A PID Set 1 Channel 1 000 to 9999 expressed in hundredths of minutes Integral 1A PID Set 2 Channel 1 000 to 9999 expressed in hundredths of minutes Integral 1A PID Set 3 Channel 1 000 to 9999 expressed in hundredths of minutes Integral 1A PID Set 4 Channel 1 oO co 10 014C5n5 oO oco 10 014C5n5 oO O0 4 O C 4 Co nho 000 to 9999 expressed in hundredths o Integral 1A PID Set 5 Channel 1 000 to 9999 expressed in hundredths o minutes minutes 7 6 Communications W atlow Series F4S D 2651 Integral 1B Cascade PID Set 1 Channel 1 rw 000 to 9999 expressed in hundredths of minutes 2661 Integral 1B Cascade PID Set 2 Channel 1 rw 000 to 9999 expressed in hundredths of minutes 2671 Integral 1B Cascade PID Set 3 Channel 1 r w 000 to 9999 expressed in hundredths of minutes 2681 Integral 1B Cascade PID Set 4 Channel 1 r w 000 to 9999 expressed in hundredths of minutes 2691 Integral 1B Cascade PID Set 5 Channel 1 r w 000 to 9999 expressed in hundredths of minutes 551 Integral 1B PID Set 1 Channel 1 r w 000 to 9999 expressed in hundredths of minutes 561 Integral 1B PID Set 2 Channel 1 r w 000 to 9999 expressed in hundredths of minutes 571 In
148. en feature or parameter operates on only the Single or the Dual Channel controller it will be identified by an icon in Single Dual the margin or nearby brane Channei Your Comments Your comments or suggestions on this manual are welcome Please send them to the Technical Literature Watlow Winona 1241 Bundy Boulevard P O Box 5580 Winona Minnesota 55987 5580 U S Telephone 1 507 454 5300 fax 1 507 452 4507 Copyright J uly 2002 by Watlow Inc with all rights reserved 2249 Series F4S D Table of Contents Introduction Chapter 1 Introduction 1 1 Chapter 2 Keys Displays and Navigation 2 1 Operations Chapter 3 Operations 3 1 Profiles Chapter 4 Profile Programming 4 1 Setup Chapter 5 Setup 00 00 5 5 1 Chapter 6 Features 005 6 1 Chapter 7 Communications 7 1 Factory Chapter 8 Security and Locks 8 1 Chapter 9 Calibration 0 9 1 Chapter 10 Diagnostics 10 1 Installation and Wiring Chapter 11 Installation 11 1 Chapter 12 Wiring 04 12 1 Appendix Glossa se onde Pd D PATET A 2 CE Declaration of Conformity A 5 Product Specifications A 6 Ordering Information A 7 Index scis va ddr SEX PR nube EAE A 8 List of Figures 05 A 13 Software Map 2000 ee
149. entered CAUTION Choose an auto tune set point value that will protect your product from possible damage from overshoot or undershoot during the autotuning oscillations If the product is sensitive select the auto tune set point very carefully to prevent product damage For additional information about autotuning and proportion al integral and derivative control see the Features Chapter Edit PID Edit PID is useful when Auto tune PID does not provide adequate control Each of the PID parame ters can be adjusted manually Proportional Band Define a band for PID con trol entered in degrees or units Lower values in crease gain which reduces droop but can cause os cillation Increase the proportional band to elimi nate oscillation 3 4 Operations Watlow Series FAS D Integral Reset Define the integral time in min utes per repeat define reset in repeats per minute Set repeats per minute if units are U S minutes per repeat if units are SI Derivative Rate Define the derivative rate time in minutes Large values prevent overshoot but can cause sluggishness Decrease if necessary Dead Band Define the dead band in degrees or units Heating dead band shifts the set point down Cooling dead band shifts the set point up For more information see the Features Chapter Manual Tuning Procedure 1 Apply power to the Series F4 and enter a set point Go to the Operations Page Edit PID Menu and begin wit
150. ention collar over the case with open holes facing the back of the case Figure 11 2b Gasket Seated on the Bezel 3 Align the mounting bracket with the screws tips pointed toward the panel Squeezing the bowed sides of the bracket push it gently but firmly over the case until the hooks snap into the slots at the front of the case 11 2 Installation Watlow Series F4S D 4 Ifthe installation does not require a NEMA 4X seal tighten the four screws with the Phillips screwdriver just enough to eliminate the spacing between the rubber gasket and the mounting panel For a NEMA 4X seal tighten the four screws until the gap between the bezel and panel surface is 020 in maximum See figure 11 1b Make sure that you cannot move the controller back and forth in the cutout If you can you do not have a proper seal Do not over tighten Over tightening could damage the the mounting bracket Removing the Series F4 Controller The controller can be removed most easily by disengaging the mounting bracket hooks and pushing the controller forward through the panel Be ready to support it as it slides forward through the panel Tools required one 2 Phillips screwdriver one flat head screwdriver and some means of supporting the controller as it slides out the front of the panel 1 Remove all the wiring connectors from the back of the controller Using the Phillips screwdriver unscrew the four screws on the mounting bracket
151. er PID Set Write Modbus Register PID 6 to 10 on Channel 1 4047 0 to 4 front panel Write Modbus Register _ Enter Minutes 4046 0 to 4 Write Modbus Register 4010 0 to 59 Enter Seconds Disable GSD Write Modbus Register sS HD GS Sek 4011 0 to 59 Guarantee Write Modbus Register CH1 dera d 4048 0 Enable GSD Write Modbus Register 4048 1 Disable GSD Write Modbus Register 4048 0 Enter Ramp Set Point Disable GSD Channel 1 Guarantee Write Modbus Register Yes Write Modbus Register Write Modbus Reaist GSD Soak 4049 0 4048 4 rite Modbus Register CH2 4044 value Enter Ramp Set Point Channel 2 Write Modbus Register Write Modbus Register 4049 1 4045 value Save Changes Write Modbus Register 25 0 Done 7 22 Communications Watlow Series F4S D F4 Modbus Applications F4 Modbus Applications Jump Step End Step Set Step Type to Jump Write Modbus Register 4003 4 Set Step Type to End Step End Hold Hold Write Modbus Register 4060 0 Set Profile to jump to Write Modbus Register 4050 1 to 40 Set Step Type to End Step End Control Off Control Off Write Modbus Register n 4060 71 Set Step Number to jump to Write Modbus Register 405171 to 256 Set Step Type to End Step End All Off All Off Write Modbus Register Set Jump Repeat to number of times to repeat Write Modbus Register 4052 1 to 999 Set Step Type to End Step End Idle Idle Wr
152. er to 100 0 to 9999 seconds 0 to 9999 1 to 9999 seconds 1 to 9999 Modbus Register read write Conditions for Default I O Set Ch Parameters to Appear 0 0 2072r w Active if Digital 8 Function is Compressor Compressor 2073r w Active if Digital 8 Function is on power Compressor 10 seconds 2075 r w Adiveif Digital 8 Function is 10 Compressor 30 seconds 2074 r w Active if Digital 8 Function is 30 Compressor WARNING Provide a labeled switch or circuit breaker near peripheral equipment per manently connected to the Series F4 digital outputs as the means of disconnection for servicing Failure to do so could result in damage to equipment and or property and or injury or death to personnel Communications Main gt Setup gt Communications Baud Rate 19200 0 Select transmission 9600 1 speed Address 1 to 247 1 to 247 Select address for controller v NOTE Press the Information Key for more task related tips 19200 Not Active Always available 1 Not Active Always available 5 14 Setup Watlow Series F4S D Parameter Description Setup Page Parameter Table Range Modbus Value Custom Main Page Main gt Setup gt Custom Main Page Modbus Register read write Default LO Set Ch P x 1 to 16 None 0 1 Current Par Input 1 Value 1 File 15 1400 1 Choose parameters Input 2 Value 2 2 Current 1401 2 to appear on Main Input 3 Value 3 Step
153. erivative x A or B Set the derivative time This section is also applicable for Cascade Inner Loop Modbus Register read write Conditions for Default U O Set Ch Parameters to Appear Tune Off 0 Channd Active Always Channel 1 on E Active if controller is set to Dual r w Channel Ramping Channel 2 Tune Off 0 305 Active if Analog I nput 3 Control r w Type is set to Cascade Tune Off 0 es Active if Analog Input 3 Control rw Type is set to Cascade PID Set x 1 to 5 Optional Inner Loop gt PID Set x 1 to 5 25 F 25 E oA m Active Always Channel 1 14 C 14 510 560 2 Default for US 520 570 3 C Default for SI 530 580 4 540 590 5 r w 0 minutes 1A 1B Se Activeif PID Units Setup Page 0 di B is set to SI and Proportional 521 571 3 Band is not set to O 531 581 4 541 591 5 r w Oper minute 1A 1B Se Activeif PID Units Setup Page 0 Es z is set to U S and Proportional 522 572 3 Band is not set to 0 532 582 4 542 592 5 r w 0 00 minutes 1A 1B Se Active if PID Units Setup Page 0 E Bl is set to SI and Proportional 523 573 3 Band is not set to O 533 583 4 543 593 5 r w NOTE For more information about how parameter settings affect the controller s operation see the Features Chapter Watlow Series FAS D Operations 3 11 Operations Page Parameter Table Modbus Register Range read write Conditions for Parameter Description Modbus Value Default V
154. ermocouple RTD Process Wet Bulb Dry Bulb Off Sensor Analog Input 3 0 Thermocouple 1 RTD 2 Process 4 Off Serial Number First Part Diagnostics 0 to 999999 AUNO 2 Serial Number Second Part Diagnostics r 0 to 999999 Set Locks see individual items to lock 1330 33 Set Password r w ASCII codes 0 9 A Z 300 Set Point 1 Value r w Range Low 1 to Range High 1 319 Set Point 2 Value r w Range Low 2 to Range High 2 603 Set Point High Limit Analog Input 1 r w Depends on Sensor 613 Set Point High Limit Analog Input 2 r w Depends on Sensor 623 Set Point High Limit Analog Input 3 r w Depends on Sensor 602 Set Point Low Limit Analog Input 1 r w Depends on Sensor 612 Set Point Low Limit Analog Input 2 r w Depends on Sensor 622 Set Point Low Limit Analog Input 3 r w Depends on Sensor 1300 Set Point Lockout r w 0 Full Access 1 Read Only 1302 Setup Page Lockout r w 0 Full Access 1 Read Only 2 Password 3 Hidden 1923 Show F or C r w 0 No Upper Display 1 Yes Upper Display Silence Alarm 1 Key Press Simulation Write any value Silence Alarm 2 Key Press Simulation Write any value Software Revision Diagnostics v NOTE 000 to 999 For more information Software Number Diagnostics 0 to 99 514 Test Outputs Test Index All Off Output 1A Output 1B Output 2A Output 2B Retransmit 1 Retransmit 2 Alarm 1 Alarm 2 Digital Out 1 Digital Out 2 11 Digital Out 3 12 Digital Out 4 13 Digital Out 5
155. es F4 is already installed in equipment 2 Wire the controller See Chapter 12 Wiring This step will not be necessary if the Series F4 is already installed in equipment Set up the controller to suit your basic application Learn to navigate the software in Chapter 2 Keys Displays and Navigation and then go to Chapter 5 Setup For background you may also want to refer to Chapter 6 Features This step may not be necessary if the Series F4 is already installed in the equipment 4 Tune the system and set alarm set points See Chapter 3 Operations 5 Set up serial communications See Chapter 7 Communications 6 Program a profile See Chapter 4 Profile Programming Run the profile or establish a set point for static set point control The Key During all these steps the Information K ey will summon helpful definitions and setup tips J ust position the cursor next to the item you want to know more about then press the key Press it again to return to your task See Chapter 3 Operations 1 4 Introduction Watlow Series F4S D Chapter Two Keys Displays amp Navigation Displays and Indicator Lights 2 2 Custom Main Page 00e eee ae eae 2 3 Keys and Navigation 00 eee eee 2 4 Guided Setup 0 00 0 cece eee 2 5 How to Enter Numbers and Names 2 6 Information Key Answers Your Questions 2 7
156. es the heating and cooling The set point for the inner loop is generated by the outer loop For Process Cascade this will have a range between the Cascade Low Range and Cascade High Range Cascade Setup Procedure 1 First configure Analog Input 3 Cascade Low Range and Cascade High Range Go to the Analog Input 3 Menu Setup Page Choose Process or Deviation Cascade Deviation Cascade references Channel 1 set point allowing a range above and below the current control set point For Process Cascade control of a heat cool or cool only system set the Cascade Low Range toa value slightly lower than the lowest temperature desired in the chamber For heat only systems set the Cascade Low Range to a value slightly lower than the ambient temperature otherwise the heat output will never turn fully off For heat cool or heat only systems set the Cas cade High Range to a value slightly higher than the highest temperature desired in the chamber For cool only systems set the Cascade High Range to a value slightly higher than the ambient tem perature otherwise the cooling will never fully turn off Next configure the controller to tune and display data for the outer loop To view Inner Loop Set Point in the upper display go to the Setup Page Custom Main Page Menu select the Inner Set point as one of the parameters P1 to P16 to be displayed in the Main Page To also view Analog Input 3 in the upper display goto the Setup Page
157. fault Wait until initialization is done Wait until initialization is done Turn the controller off then on again Turn the controller off then on again Turn the controller off then on again Call your Watlow distributor or represen tative Call your Watlow distributor or represen tative Watlow Series FAS D Operations 3 9 Operations Page Map Autotune PID PID Set Channel 2 Channel 1 Autotune PID Set 6 10 Tune Off Proportional Band A PID Set 1 IntegralA ResetA PID Set 2 DerivativeA RateA PID Set 3 Dead Band A PID Set 4 Hysteresis A PID Set 5 Proportional Band B Channel 2 Autotune IntegralB ResetB Tune Off DerivativeB RateB PID Set 6 Dead Band B PID Set 7 Hysteresis B PID Set 8 Cascade PID Set PID Set 9 Cascade Set 1 5 PID Set 10 Proportional Band A Channel 1 Outer Loop Autotune IntegralA ResetA PID Set Cl DerivativeA RateA PID Set C2 Dead Band A PID Set C3 Hysteresis A PID Set C4 Proportional Band B PID Set C5 IntegralB ResetB Edit PID DerivativeB RateB PID Set Channel 1 Dead Band B PID Set 1 5 Hysteresis B Proportional Band A Alarm Set Points IntegralA ResetA Alarml Low SP DerivativeA RateA Alarml High SP Dead Band A Alarml Lo Deviation Hysteresis A Alarml Hi Deviation Proportional Band B Alarm2 Low SP IntegralB ResetB Alarm2 High SP DerivativeB RateB Alarm2 Lo Deviation Dead Band B Alarm2 Hi Deviation Hysteresis B v NOTE Some parameters may not appear depen
158. g process Once complete the controller controls at the nor mal set point using the new parameters The F4 stores the value in the PID set specified Location in software Operations Page gt Autotune PID gt Channel 1 Autotune gt PID Set x 1 to 5 or Channel 2 Autotune gt PID Set x 6 to 10 A CAUTION Choose an auto tune set point value that will protect your product from possible damage from overshoot or undershoot during the autotuning oscillations If the product is sensitive carefully select the auto tune set point to prevent product damage Power Out Time Power Out Action The Power Out Time and Power Out Action param eters direct the F 4 s response to the interruption of electrical power while running a profile The F 4 s battery powered real time dock tracks the amount of time the power is out When power is restored the controller compares this amount of time to the Power Out Time setting and takes whatever action is selected in the Power Out Action setting First determine how long the power can be inter rupted without adversely affecting results Set the Power Out Time tothis time If power is returned in less time than this setting the profile will re sume running The profile run time stops while the power is off If power is returned after a time longer than this setting the F4 will take action based on the user configured Power Out Action pa rameter Continue resume the profile at the point that powe
159. gnostics overview 10 1 menu map 10 1 Digital Inputs x 5 10 5 11 6 3 Condition 2 3 2 8 5 10 5 11 Function 5 11 Name 5 10 number of 1 1 see event input specifications A 6 status 2 3 2 8 wiring 12 6 Digital Outputs x condition 2 3 2 8 Function 5 13 Name 5 13 number of 1 1 see event output specifications A 6 wiring 12 9 dimensions 11 1 11 2 Display Test 10 4 displays 2 2 2 4 cursor 2 2 front panel 2 2 Lower Display 2 2 scroll bar 2 2 Upper Display 2 2 displays overview 2 1 dry bulb 5 8 dual channel 1 1 dwell see soak soak step E edit PID 3 4 3 11 Edit PID Menu 2 5 3 4 3 5 3 11 3 12 edit profile 4 6 End step 4 3 4 15 action end step 4 6 Idle Set Point Channel x 4 16 Enter Cycle Time 5 11 Enter In1 Temp High 5 9 Enter In1 Temp Low 5 9 enter key 2 6 environmental testing 1 2 1 3 Error Latch Analog Input x 5 10 errors fatal errors 3 8 3 9 input errors 3 8 3 9 operation 3 8 3 9 system errors 3 8 3 9 troubleshooting 3 8 3 9 event input 4 13 6 3 see Digital Input x event output ramp rate or ramp time or soak steps 4 12 see Digital Output x F Factory Page 2 1 8 1 9 1 10 1 lockout 8 3 parameter table 9 7 Fahrenheit scale 5 1 Filter Time 5 10 6 2 filter time constant 6 2 Frequently Asked Questions 4 10 Full Access 8 1 8 3 Full Default 10 1 10 4 Function Control Output x 5 11 Digital Input x 5 11 Digital Output x 5 13 G global system parameters 5 4 Guarantee Soak 4 3 Guarante
160. h Limit 1 expressed in 766 Low Power Limit Control Output 2B r w 0 to High Limit 1 expressed in 710 Low Scale Retransmit Output 1 r w 19999 to Scale High 1 minimum sensor range 727 Low Scale Retransmit Output 2 r w 19999 to Scale High 2 minimum sensor range 5 Mfg Date Diagnostics r XXXX 0 Model Diagnostics r F4 3200 09 Name Alarm 1 10 characters r w ASCII equivalent decimal code see Modbus Naming F 3210 19 Name Alarm 2 10 characters rw ASCII equivalent decimal code see Modbus Naming F 3000 06 Name Digital Input 1 7 characters r w ASCII equivalent decimal code see Modbus Naming F 3010 16 Name Digital Input 2 7 characters r w ASCII equivalent decimal code see Modbus Naming F 3020 26 Name Digital Input 3 7 characters rw ASCII equivalent decimal code see Modbus Naming F 3030 36 Name Digital Input 4 7 characters r w ASCII equivalent decimal code see Modbus Naming F 3100 09 Name Digital Output 1 10 characters r w ASCII equivalent decimal code see Modbus Naming F 3110 19 Name Digital Output 2 10 characters r w ASCII equivalent decimal code see Modbus Naming F owchart owchart owchart owchart owchart owchart owchart owchart 3120 29 r w 3130 39 r w 3140 49 r w 3150 59 r w 3160 69 r w 3170 79 r w 904 r w 907 r w 200 r 900 r w 1206 r w 1213 r w 5500 r w 5501 r w 5502 r w 5503 r w
161. h Proportional Band set to 5 Inte gral Reset set to 0 Derivative Rate set to 0 and Autotune set to Tune Off 2 Start manual tuning by entering the desired set point and let the system stabilize Once the sys tem stabilizes observe the value of Input 1 on the Main Page If the Input 1 value fluctuates increase the proportional band setting until it stabilizes Adjust the proportional band in 5 to 102increments allowing time between adjust ments for the system to stabilize 3 Once Input 1 has stabilized observe the percent power on the Main Page It should be stable 2 At this point the process temperature should also be stable but it will exhibit droop stabilized below set point The droop can be eliminated with reset or integral 4 Start with a reset setting of 0 01 and allow 10 minutes for the process temperature to come up to set point If it has not increasethe setting to 0 05 and wait another 10 minutes After this double the reset setting and wait another 10 minutes until the process value equals the set point If the process becomes unstable the reset value is too large Decrease the setting until the process stabilizes 5 Increase Derivative Rate to 0 10 minute Then raise the set point by 20 to 30 F or 11 to 17 C Observe the system s approach to the se point If the load process value overshoots the set point increase Derivative Rate to 0 50 minute Raise the set point by 20 to 30 F or 11
162. hannel 1 Current Profile Status End Set Point Channel 2 Current Profile Status Custom Message 1 Custom Message 2 Custom Message 3 Custom Message 4 Process Display Process Display Input 1 Time Process Display Input 2 Time Process Display Input 3 Time v NOTE For more information about parameters see the Index Watlow Series FAS D Communications 7 15 Communications Page Parameter Table Parameter Description Communications Main gt Setup gt Communications Baud Rate Address Set the transmission speed in bits seconds Set the controller s ad dress between 1 and 247 Range Modbus Value 19200 9600 1 to 247 Default 19200 NOTE For more information about how parameter settings affect the controller s operation see the Features Chapter Modbus Register read write VO Set Ch No Modbus address NoModbus address Conditions for Parameters to Appear Active Always Active Always 7 16 Communications Watlow Series FAS D F4 Modbus Applications Profile Programming Procedures F4 Modbus Applications Profile Overview Create Profile Write to Modbus Register 4002 1 Determine Profile Number Read Modbus Register 4000 Optional Rename Profile See Rename Profile Save Changes Write Modbus Register 25 0 Add and Edit Steps See Editing Deleting Starting a Profile sheet UU UN J File will be added at the lowest availab
163. he hysteresis value indicates the amount the process value must deviate from the set point to turn on the output Increasing the value de creases the number of times the output will cycle Decreasing hysteresis improves controllability With hysteresis set to 0 the process value would stay clos er to the set point but the output would switch on and off more frequently causing chattering Set the proportional band to 0 to set the controller to on off control mode Proportional Band x A or B location in software Operations Page gt Edit PID gt PID Channel x 1 or 2 gt PID Set x 1 to 5 or 6 or 10 Hysteresis x A or B location in software Opera tions Page gt Edit PID gt PID Set Channel x 1 or 2 gt PID Set x 1 to 5 or 6 or 10 v NOTE Fail power does not function in on off control mode Proportional Control Some processes need to maintain a temperature or process value closer to the set point than on off con trol can provide Proportional control provides clos er control by adjusting the output when the tem perature or process value is within a proportional band When the value is in the band the controller adjusts the output based on how close the process value is to the set point the closer to set point the lower the output This is similar to backing off on the gas pedal of a car as you approach a stop sign t keeps the temperature or process value from swinging as widely as it would with simple on
164. idify out puts 2A and 2B are disabled when the input 1 temperature is too low 40 F 40 C or too high 320 F 160 C The relative humidity display in the Main Page will display RH Disabled for a low temperature error and RH Disabled for a high temper ature error The Series F4 provides temperature compensation for the Rotronics Model H260 Capacitive Relative Humidity Sensor to calculate relative humidity on channel 2 The humidify and de humidify outputs 2A and 2B are disabled when the input 1 temperature is too low 5 F 20 C or too high 320 F 160 C The relative humidity display in the Main Page will display RH Disabled for a low temperature error and RH Disabled for a high temperature error 5 8 Setup Watlow Series F4S D Setup Page Parameter Table Modbus Register Range read write Conditions for Parameter Description Modbus Value Default I O Set Ch Parameters to Appear Altitude 0 to 2499 ft 0 0 to 2499 ft 1902 r w Active if Analog Input 2 Type is Select an elevation 2500 to 4999 ft 1 0 Wet Bulb Dry Bulb to compensate for 5000 ft and above 2 wet bulb evapora tion rates Units Temperature 0 Temperature Input Active if Sensor Type is set to Select the units of amp h 1 0 e E Process measure for the psi 2 628 3 input units 3 r w Decimal 0 0 0 0 Input Active if Sensor Type is set to Set the decimal ede 2 Cio i AE oint for input Ue DEORE z 0 000
165. in hundredths of minutes 2615 Dead Band 1A Cascade PID Set 2 Channel 1 2663 Derivative 1B Cascade PID Set 2 Channel 1 r w 0 to 30000 rw 000 to 999 expressed in hundredths of minutes 2625 Dead Band 1A Cascade PID Set 3 Channel 1 2673 Derivative 1B Cascade PID Set 3 Channel 1 rw 0 to 30000 r w 000 to 999 expressed in hundredths of minutes 2635 Dead Band 1A Cascade PID Set 4 Channel 1 2683 Derivative 1B Cascade PID Set 4 Channel 1 rw 0 to 30000 rw 000 to 999 expressed in hundredths of minutes 2645 Dead Band 1A Cascade PID Set 5 Channel 1 2693 Derivative 1B Cascade PID Set 5 Channel 1 rw 0 to 30000 rw 000 to 999 expressed in hundredths of minutes 505 Dead Band 1A PID Set 1 Channel 1 553 Derivative 1B PID Set 1 Channel 1 rw 0 to 30000 r w 000 to 999 expressed in hundredths of minutes 515 Dead Band 1A PID Set 2 Channel 1 563 Derivative 1B PID Set 2 Channel 1 r w 0 to 30000 rw 000 to 999 expressed in hundredths of minutes 525 Dead Band 1A PID Set 3 Channel 1 573 Derivative 1B PID Set 3 Channel 1 rw 0 to 30000 r w 000 to 999 expressed in hundredths of minutes 535 Dead Band 1A PID Set 4 Channel 1 583 Derivative 1B PID Set 4 Channel 1 rw 0 to 30000 r w 000 to 999 expressed in hundredths of minutes 545 Dead Band 1A PID Set 5 Channel 1 593 Derivative 1B PID Set 5 Channel 1 r w 0 to 30000 r w 000 to 999 expressed in hundredths of minutes 2655 Dead Band 1B Cascade PID Set 1 Channel 1 2503 Derivative 2A PID Set 6 Channel 2
166. ion Key lille 2 7 Chapter 3 Sample Application Running a Profile 3 7 Chapter 4 Eight Step Profile 0 0 eee eee 4 2 Sample Application Programming a Profile 4 8 Profile Chart for Military Standard 810D Test 4 9a Graph of Military Standard 810D Test 4 9b Chapter 5 Parameters on the Custom Main Page 5 2 Sample Application Setup 5 4 5 5 Chapter 6 Calibration Offset 0 0 00 cee eee ee 6 2a Filtered and Unfiltered Input Signals 6 2b Sensor Ranges l l cece eee eee 6 3a On off Control for Heating and Cooling 6 4a Proportional Control 000000 eee 6 4b Proportional Plus Integral Control 6 5a PID COMON cosirer en ena aa ee 6 5b Cooling Dead Band 200005 6 5c Burst Fil eera teessa RR ERE REESE 6 6 Autotuning seleruId ee IRR d oe 6 7 Alarm Settings 0 0 0 ce eee eee 6 8 Alarm Latching 0 20 e eee eee 6 9a Alarm Silencing 0 0c eee eee eee 6 9b Boost Heat and Boost Cool 6 10a Compressor Power 20 0000e lesse 6 10b Control Lag Times 0 cece e eee eee 6 11a Cascade Control sess 6 11b Cascade Example 0c cece ee aee 6 11c List of Figures Chapter 11 Front View Dimensions and Gap Dimension 11 1a Side and Top View and Dimensions 11 1b Multiple Panel Cutout Dimension
167. ire hazard or other hazard Failure to install temperature limit control protection where a potential hazard exists could result in damage to equipment property and injury to personnel Wiring Example Li e 120V ac 2 high limit mechanical contactor Series F4 F4 H CA O1RG rear view DIN A MITE A DA10 24C0 0000 cas a normally open momentary switch m 3 4 97A1 DDAA 00RR Limit Controller SERRE RRR TITITPEPEPPEDEBR TETETEPPPEDIIEUS limit sensor process sensor 120V ac 1 L L2 Series F4 FA H CA 01RG Temperature Controller OO GO DIN A MITE DA10 24C0 0000 Series 97 97A1 DDAA 00RR Limit Controller 0000 OOO high temperature light Figure 12 12 System Wiring Example 12 12 Wiring Watlow Series F4S D Appendix Glossary aa aa aaa aT eee A 2 Declaration of Conformity 2 A 5 Specifications Single and Dual Channel A 6 Ordering Information Single and Dual A 7 Index uc nb EVE e alee oad A 8 List of Figures 2 2 0 c eee eee A 13 Software Map 0 0 cece eee eee A 16 Watlow Series F4S D Appendix A 1 Glossary ac See alternating current ac dc Both direct and alternating current alternating current An electric current that reverses at regular intervals and alternates posi
168. istant on off controller A temperature controller that operates in either full on or full off modes open loop A control system with no sensory feedback output Control signal action in response to the difference between set point and process variable overshoot The amount by which a process vari able exceeds the set point before it stabilizes page A fixed length block of data that can be stored as a complete unit in the computer memory P control Proportioning control PD control Proportioning control with deriva tive rate action PDR control Proportional derivative control with manual reset used in fast responding systems where the reset causes instabilities With PDR con trol an operator can enter a manual reset value that eliminates droop in the system PI control Proportioning control with integral auto reset action PID Proportional integral derivative A control mode with three functions proportional action dampens the system response integral corrects for droop and derivative prevents overshoot and un dershoot process variable The parameter that is con trolled or measured Typical examples are tempera ture relative humidity pressure flow fluid level Watlow Series F4S D Appendix A 3 events etc The high process variable is the highest value of the process range expressed in engineer ing units The low process variable is the lowest va
169. it 1 Wait for Off 2 Waitfor On 4044 Ramp Set Point Channel 1 Ramp Rate or Ramp Time Step rw Range low to range high 4045 Ramp Set Point Channel 2 Ramp Time Step rw Range low to range high 4009 Ramp Time hours rw 0 to 99 4010 Ramp Time minutes rw 0059 7 12 Communications Watlow Series F4S D Parameters Sorted by Modbus Register 304 308 311 313 319 321 322 323 324 330 331 343 349 501 502 504 505 507 509 511 512 514 515 Model Diagnostics Serial Number First Part Diagnostics Serial Number Second Part Diagnostics Software Number Diagnostics Software Revision Diagnostics Mfg Date Diagnostics Input 1 Type Diagnostics Input 2 Type Diagnostics Input 3 Type Diagnostics Output 1A Type Diagnostics Output 1B Type Diagnostics Output 2A Type Diagnostics Output 2B Type Diagnostics Retransmit 1 Type Diagnostics Retransmit 2 Type Diagnostics Save Changes to EE nput 1 Value Status nput 1 Error Status Alarm 1 Status Power Output 1A Status nput 2 Value Status nput 2 Error Status Alarm 2 Status Power Output 1B Status nput 3 Value Status nput 3 Error Status Power Output 2A Status Power Output 2B Status Operation Mode Status Digital Input 1 Status Input 1 Open Loop Status Digital Input 2 Status Input 2 Open Loop Status Digital Input 3 Status Digital Input 4 Status Set Point 1 value Alarm Low Set Point and Deviation
170. ite Modbus Register 4060 Save Changes Write Modbus Register Set End Idle Setpoint 1 Save Changes Write Modbus Register Write Modbus Register 4061 value 25 0 J ump initiates another step or profile File must exist at location specified Business Write Modbus Register 4062 value Watlow Series FAS D Communications 7 23 F4 Modbus Applications Editing Deleting Starting a Profile Set File Number Write to Modbus Register 40 possible 4000 1 to 40 profiles Do you wish Delete All Profiles to delete all Write to Modbus Register Profiles 4002 255 Set Step 1 Delete Profile Write Modbus Register Write to Modbus Register 4001 1 4002 3 Set Step Do you wish Write Modbus Register to delete this 4001 1 to 256 Profile Save Changes Write Modbus Register Do you wish 25 0 to Start this Profile Start Profile Write to Modbus Register 4002 5 Do you wish to inserta Step Yes Delete a file to free memory before adding more steps Read Step Type Step Type Read Modbus Register 0 Autostart Are there 4003 1 Time lt 256 Steps 2 Rate used Do you wish 3 Soak to delete this 4 Jump Step 5 End Yes Can t Delete End Step See sheets on setting step types Autostart Time Rate Soak Jump or End Insert Step Write Modbus Register 4002 2 Delete Step Write to Modbus Register 4002 4 Save Changes Write Modb
171. ize digital inputs that are pro grammed to start a profile Only one profile can be run at a time This prompt only appears if the F4 memory contains a profile Active Always Digital inputs are edge trig gered and require a transition from high to low or low to high Active if Analog Inputs 1 and 2 are enabled Active always Active if the selected output is not Process and Burst is set to No Active if the selected output is set to a process output Active Always Active Always Watlow Series FAS D Setup 5 11 Setup Page Parameter Table Parameter Description Range Modbus Value Alarm Output x 1 and 2 Main gt Setup gt Alarm Output x 1 and 2 Name Name the alarm for easy reference Alarm Type Select the alarm type Alarm Source Select the alarm source Latching Choose automatic or manual clearing of alarms Silencing Choose whether to mask alarms on power up Alarm Hysteresis Set the alarm hysteresis Alarm Sides Choose to enable Low High or both alarm set points Alarm Logic Select the alarm logic option Alarm Messages Select the alarm message option lt selected by user gt ASCII Values Off 0 Process 1 Deviation 2 Input 1 0 Input 2 1 Input 3 2 Alarm Self Clears 0 Alarm Latches 1 No 0 Yes 1 1 to 30000 1 to 30000 Both 0 Low 1 High 2 Open on Alarm 0 Close on Alarm 1 Yes
172. l Output 2 Monitor Current Status Profile 0 Off 1 On Digital Output 3 Monitor Current Status Profile Off Oc 1 On Digital Output 4 Monitor Current Status Profile Off 1 On Digital Output 5 Monitor Current Status Profile 0 Off 1 On Digital Output 6 Monitor Current Status Profile 0 Off 1 On Digital Output 7 Monitor Current Status Profile 0 Off 1 On Digital Output 8 Monitor Current Status Profile 0 Off 1 On Edit Profile Action 1 Create 2 Insert Step 3 Delete Current Profile 4 Delete Step 5 Start Profile 255 Delete All Profiles End Action End Step Hold 1 Control Off 2 Al Off 3 Idle End Idle Setpoint Channel 1 End Step Set Point 1 Low Limit to Set Point 1 High Limit End Idle Setpoint Channel 2 End Step Set Point 2 Low Limit to Set Point 2 High Limit End Set Point Channel 1 Current Profile Status Range Low 1 to Range High 1 End Set Point Channel 2 Current Profile Status Range Low 2 to Range High 2 4030 r w 4031 r w 4032 r w 4033 r w 4034 r w 4035 r w 4036 r w 4037 r w 4048 r w 4049 r w 1210 4119 4126 r 4127 r 4052 r w 4128 r 4050 r w 4051 r w 4120 r 3500 09 r w 3510 19 r w 3520 29 r w 3530 39 r w 3540 49 r w 3550 59 3560 69 3570 79 3580 89 3590 99 3600 09 3610 19 3620 29 3630 39 3640 49 3650 59 3660 69 3670 79 3680 89 3690 99 Event Output 1 Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps 0 Off 1 On Event Output 2
173. l plus derivative PID control 6 5 derivative 6 5 PV bias see calibration offset questions 4 10 R Ramp Rate 4 2 4 12 4 13 Ramp Set Point Channel x 4 13 ramp steps number of 1 1 Ramp Time 4 12 4 13 ramping mode 3 2 ramping profile 4 2 range high 6 3 rangelow 6 3 Rate 6 5 Cascade Inner Loop 3 12 Cascade Outer Loop 3 13 PID Set 1to5 3 11 PID Set 6to 10 3 12 read only 8 1 real time clock 1 1 recipe see file or profile Records Custom Main Page 5 3 Operations Page Record 3 15 Profile Page Record 4 7 Setup Page Record 5 15 reference compensator 9 2 registers Modbus 7 2 7 15 profile 7 10 7 12 relative humidity RH 5 5 removing the controller 11 3 renaming profiles see naming profiles Reset 6 5 Cascade Inner Loop 3 11 Cascade Outer Loop 3 13 PID Set 1to5 3 11 PID Set 6to 10 3 12 resistance temperature detector RTD 5 4 restore factory calibration values 9 1 Resume Profile 3 3 retransmit outputs calibration 9 5 9 6 diagnostics 10 3 wiring 12 8 Retransmit Source 5 12 retransmitting 6 3 chart recorder 6 3 outputs 1 and 2 6 3 remote set point 6 3 Rotronics 5 8 RTD 5 4 A 6 input calibration 9 2 inputs wiring 12 3 12 4 S safety info ii sample application enviroonmental Watlow Series FAS D Appendix A 11 testing 1 2 1 3 3 7 4 8 4 9 5 4 5 5 Scale High 5 9 6 3 Scale Low 5 9 6 3 Scale Offset 5 13 scroll bar 2 2 security and locks overview 8 1 full access 8 1 hidden 8 1 password 8 1 rea
174. larm Hysteresis __ ns you want to change A e 4 Press to enter You ll change the value the value on If the cursor this line E 3 Scroll to increase or is at Z press decrease the value of ein i aM down to A then from 9 to 0 Blank is on the end 2 Move v or left if necessary to choose the digit to change Some numbers increase or decrease as single units others digit by digit The active position is underlined WATLOW Names 1 Navigate Enter Alarm hanes 4 Press to move to the to the parameter 7 eter LARMI ane end of the 10 character name ou want to Ane space and proceed to the ETE next screen This enters the f Go name You ll change each letter on this nameable 3 Scroll to choose the new 10 character j letter or a number Blank liti 2 Move right or left to choose the character to change The position is underlined Figure 2 6 How to Enter Numbers and Names F4D shown 2 6 Keys Displays and Navigation Watlow Series F4S D O Information Key Answers Your Questions There s a wealth of information about features and 2 Pressthe key The displayed information will parameters right in the Series F4 controller Use assist you during setup and operation When the I nformation Key to get this information information takes more than four lines the 1 Use the four navigation keys O 0 scroll bar will be filled or weighted at the end to position the cursor gt next to th
175. larm2 Low SP Alarm2 High SP Profiles Page see Chapter 4 Create Profile Name Profile Step x 1 to 256 Type Autostart Date Day Ramp Time Wait For Event Output Time Chl SP Ch2 SP Chl PID Set x 1 to 5 Ch2 PID Set x 6 to 10 Guarantee Soakl Guarantee Soak2 Ramp Rate Wait For Event Output Rate Chl SP Ch2 SP Chl PID Set x 1 to 5 Guarantee Soakl Ch2 PID Set x 6 to 10 Guarantee Soak2 Soak Wait For Event Output Time Chl PID Set x 1 to 5 Guarantee Soakl Ch2 PID Set x 6 to 10 Guarantee Soak2 Jump Jump to Profile x 1 to 40 Jump to Step x Number Of Repeats End Hold Control Off All Off Idle Edit Profile Profile x 1 to 40 Insert Step x 1 to 256 Insert Before Step x Step x Type seebdow Edit Step Step x Type Autostart Date Day Ramp Time Wait For Event Output Time Chl SP Ch2 SP Chl PID Set x 1 to 5 Guarantee Soakl Ch2 PID Set x 6 to 10 Guarantee Soak2 Ramp Rate Wait For Event Output Rate Chl SP Ch2 SP Chl PID Set x 1 to 5 Guarantee Soakl Ch2 PID Set x 6 to 10 Guarantee Soak2 Soak Wait For Event Output Time Chl PID Set x 1 to 5 Guarantee Soakl Ch2 PID Set x 6 to 10 Guarantee Soak2 Jump Jump to Profile x 1 to 40 Jump to Step x Number Of Repeats End Hold Control Off All Off Idle Delete Step Done Delete Profile x 1 to 40 Re Name Profile x 1 to 40 A 16 Appendix Watlow Series F4 Upper Display process information WATLOW Cursor Main
176. le location Register 4000 contains file number of newly created file File has default name of PROFILEx where x is a value of 1 to 40 This step saves changes Program the controller to do what you want it to do A maximum of 40 files may be created with a total of 256 steps Each time a new file is creat ed the file is placed after the previously created file As files are deleted newly created files are placed into these locations Modbus Register 4000 returns the file number of the newly created file Profiles without custom written names are referred to by their numbers Profile 1 Profile 2 etc Watlow Series FAS D Communications 7 17 F4 Modbus Applications Creating a Profile Set File Number Assumes file does not exist Write Modbus Register Use 1 to 40 4000 1 to 40 File will be placed at lowest empty file location Create Profile Optional Set Current Step Number Insert Step Write Modbus Register Rename Profile Write Modbus Register Write Modbus Register 4002 1 Registers 3500 thru 3899 4001 1 to 256 4002 2 Step Type Autostart Step Type Time Step Type Rate Step Type Soak Step Type Jump See Autostart See Time See Rate See Soak See Jump Step Type sheet Step Type sheet Step Type sheet Step Type sheet Step Type sheet for options for options for options for options for options Done with profile Yes Set Step Number to where the End
177. lete an existing profile In the Series F4 you v NOTE For more information about how parameter settings affect the controller s operation see the Features Chapter v NOTE If your Series F4 is a single channel controller you will see only the temperature on Channel 1 of the embedded profile This is not the true Military Standard Test 810D choose from a list of the steps and their param eters much like in previous controllers e You will also find a User Profile Record to use to record the steps and parameters for your profiles If you receive this controller as a separate unit you will have to install wire and configure the Series F4 before you set up a ramping profile If you receive this controller already installed in an environmental chamber furnace or other equi p ment continue with this chapter You will not have to configure the controller if the manufacturer has done this for you You should check the Setup Page in the controller software for settings of relevant inputs and outputs v NOTE Make sure your controller inputs are properly configured before entering profiles Analog Input setup changes may delete profiles Watlow Series FAS D Profile Programming 4 1 What Is a Ramping Profile A ramp is a programmed change from one set point to another A soak maintains the set point over a period of time A profile is a set of instructions programmed as a sequence of steps The controller handle
178. like new condition and must be returned within 120 days of initial receipt of the product ii Table of Contents Watlow Series FAS D Chapter One Introduction Overview Watlow s Series F 4 1 4 DIN industrial ramping e controllers are easy to set up program and operate in the most demanding ramp and soak processing applications The F4 includes e four line high resolution LCD display guided setup and programming software 16 bit microprocessor Inputs and Outputs 1 Universal WATLOW Analog Input i Single 2 optional i Channel Alarml ike Devsiation F4S mH Adjusts Value 4 Digital Inputs 3 lt Back gt Next itr 1 Communication I O Figure 1 1a Single Channel Series F4 FAS WATLOW 3 Universal Dual Analog Inputs Channel F4D Alarm2 Low SP 32 er Adjusts Value a N 4 Digital Inputs 1 Communication l O Figure 1 1b Dual Channel Series F4 FAD 256 possible ramp steps in as many as 40 vari able length nameable profiles six step types eight programmable event outputs compressor control boost heat boost cool power out selec tions and a real time clock Note the F 4S has two less analog inputs and two less control outputs than the F4D 2 Control Outputs gt 2 Alarm Outputs 2 Retransmit Outputs optional ane cane e 8 Digital Outputs 4 Control Outputs 2 Alarm Outputs 2 Ret
179. ling of an electrome chanical relay or mercury displacement relay due to insufficient controller bandwidth It is commonly caused by excessive gain little hysteresis and short cycle time CJC See cold junction compensation closed loop A control system that uses a sensor to measure a process variable and makes decisions based on that feedback cold junction See junction cold cold junction compensation Electronic means to compensate for the effective temperature at the cold junction control mode Thetype of action that a con troller uses For example on off time proportion ing PID automatic or manual and combinations of these cycle time Thetime required for a controller to complete one on off on cyde It is usually expressed in seconds deadband The range through which a variation of the input produces no noticeable change in the output In the dead band specific conditions can be placed on control output actions Operators select the deadband value default parameters The programmed instruc tions that are permanently stored in the micropro cessor software derivative The rate of change in a process vari able Also known as rate See PID derivative control D The last term in the PID control algorithm Action that anticipates the rate of change of the process and compensates to minimize overshoot and undershoot Derivative control is an instantaneous change of the
180. lue Wait for E vents are set up in the Setup Page 2 Event outputs to turn on or off if digital out puts are set up as events in the Setup Page 3 Time in hours minutes and seconds 4 Channel 1 Set Point 5 Channel 2 Set Point if dual channel 6 PID set one of five sets of heat cool PID pa rameters per channel pre defined in the Oper ations Page 7 Guaranteed Soak requires the actual process value to stay within the Soak Band as set in the System Menu F4S Ramp Rate Channel Ramp Rate for single channel only changes the set point to a new value at a chosen rate Define the Ramp Rate step by choosing 1 Wait for an event or process value Wait for Events are set up in the Setup Page 2 Event outputs to turn on or off if digital out puts are set up as events in the Setup Page 3 Rate units per minute 4 Channel 1 Set Point 5 PID set one of five sets of heat cool PID pa rameters pre defined in the Operations Page 6 Guaranteed Soak requires the actual process value to stay within the Soak Band as set in the System Menu 4 2 Profile Programming Watlow Series FAS D Soak Soak maintains the set point from the previous step for a chosen time in hours minutes and sec onds Define the Soak step by choosing 1 Wait for an event or process value Wait for Events are set up in the Setup Page 2 Event outputs to turn on or off if digital out puts are set up as events
181. lue of the process range proportional Output effort proportional to the error from set point For example if the proportion al band is 20 and the process is 10 below set point the heat proportioned effort is 50 percent The lower the PB value the higher the gain proportional band PB A range in which the proportioning function of the control is active Ex pressed in units degrees or percent of span See PID proportional control A control using only the P proportional value of PID control radio frequency interference RFI Electro magnetic waves between the frequencies of 10 KHz and 300 GHz that can affect susceptible systems by conduction through sensor or power input lines and by radiation through space ramp A programmed increase in the tempera ture of a set point system range The area between two limits in which a quantity or value is measured It is usually de scribed in terms of lower and upper limits rate Anticipatory action that is based on the rate of temperature change and compensates to minimize overshoot and undershoot See derivative rate band A range in which the rate function of a controller is active Expressed in multiples of the proportional band See PID reference junction see junction reference reset Control action that automatically elimi nates offset or droop between set point and actual process temperature Also see integral autom
182. m the Key f you do not know a term press the Key when the cursor points to the word in the dis play text Or check the glossary in the Ap pendix of this user manual Enter Ramp Time X 00 00 01 H M S WA Adjusts Digit lt gt Save Changes Save profile data E or restore values M V Restore A Save E TT TT TT TTT TTT type that changes new value in a user chosen period of time i Ramp Time A step the set point to a B v Watlow Series FAS D Profile Programming 4 5 How to Edit a Profile To change one or more parameters in any step of a profile choose Edit Profile on the Profiles Page 1 Go to the Profiles Page Move the cursor to Go to Profile at the bottom of the Main Page then press Main gt Profile 2 Choose to edit a profile CR mp ETE Press gt Edit Profile Delete Profile 3 Choose the profile you want to edit R Press O gt Glaze 42 Glaze 43 4 Choose how you change the profile Glaze 56 Choose whether you want to insert a new step edit a specific step or delete a step To edit a step Choose tos NE Insert Step e Select the number of the step you wish toedit spgit Step from a list of steps and step types Delete Step The next screen presents a list of all possible step types The cursor will be positioned on the current step type To keep it press and make your changes to the properties listed on succeeding screens f yo
183. me Profile 21 10 characters Name Profile 22 10 characters Name Profile 23 10 characters Name Profile 24 10 characters Name Profile 25 10 characters Name Profile 26 10 characters Name Profile 27 10 characters 3770 79 3780 89 3790 99 3800 09 3810 19 3820 29 3830 39 3840 49 3850 59 3860 69 3870 79 3880 89 3890 99 4014 4015 4016 4021 4022 4023 4024 4025 4026 4030 4031 4032 4033 4034 4035 4036 4037 4043 4044 4045 4046 4047 4048 Name Profile 28 10 characters Name Profile 29 10 characters Name Profile 30 10 characters Name Profile 31 10 characters Name Profile 32 10 characters Name Profile 33 10 characters Name Profile 34 10 characters Name Profile 35 10 characters Name Profile 36 10 characters Name Profile 37 10 characters Name Profile 38 10 characters Name Profile 39 10 characters Name Profile 40 10 characters Profile Number Profile Step Number Profile Edit Action Profile Step Type Autostart Profile Date or Day Autostart Date month Autostart Date day Autostart Date year Autostart Day of week Autostart Time hours Autostart Time minutes Autostart Time seconds Ramp Time hours Ramp Time minutes Ramp Time seconds Soak Step Time hours Soak Step Time minutes Soak Step Time seconds Wait Don t Wait Ramp Rate or Ramp Time or Soak Steps Wait For Event 1 Ramp Rate or
184. minate the profile Default is to Don t Hold If you choose to hold the profile the Main Page reap pears and the Profile Status message reads Profile X holding The Profile Indicator Light is off If you do not make a choice when the Profile Action Menu appears the profile continues running and the profile indicator light stays on To Resume a Profile on Hold 1 Press the Profile Key whilea profileis holding The Resume Profile Menu appears 2 Choose to Continue Holding Resume or Terminate the profile If you do not make a choice the profile continues holding and the Profile Indicator Light stays off To Terminate a Running Holding Profile 1 Press the Profile Key while a profile is running The Profile Action Menu appears 2 Choose to Continue Hold or Terminate the profile Default is to Continue If you choose to terminate the profile ends with all outputs off The set point on the Main Page reads off If you do not make a choice when the Profile Action Menu appears the profile continues as it was running or holding The Profile Key initiates the ramping profile mode initiates the Hold profile state initiates the Resume profile command initiates the Terminate profile command ele Prorii s am Don t Hold gt Hold Terminate v NOTE While profiles are on hold the step set point value can be adjusted using the Static Set Point parameter on the Main Page Resume Profile
185. n dudes dead band as long as the proportional band is not set to 0 Location in software Operations Page Edit PID gt PID Set Channel x 1 or 2 gt PID Set x 1 to 5 or 6 to 10 Burst Fire Burst firing provides even output power with the lowest level of noise generation RFI Burst fire is the preferred method for controlling a resistive load providing a very short time base for longer heater life The controller determines when the ac sine wave will cross the O volts point then switches the load on or off only at this point minimizing RFI Location in software Setup Page gt Control Output x 1 to 3 Channel 1 Heat Cool Output 1A Heat Output 1B Cool PID Sets 1 to 5 Channel 2 Relative Humidity Output 2A Humidify Output 2B Dehumidify PropBand A PID Sets 6 to 10 Integral A PropBand A Derivative A Integral A Dead Band A Derivative A PropBand B Dead Band A Integral B PropBand B Derivative B Integral B Dead Band B Derivative B Dead Band B 100 output 10 ON 0 OFF 50 output 1 ON 1 OFF 66 output 2 ON 1 OFF Figure 6 6 Burst Fire 6 6 Features Watlow Series FAS D Other Features Autotuning The autotuning feature allows the controller to measure the system response to determine effective settings for PID control When autotuning is initi ated the controller reverts to on off control The temperature must cross the auto tune set point four times to complete the autotunin
186. n addresses are read only Y NOTE Press the Information Key amp for task related tips 4061 r w 4062 r w Active Always Channel 1 Active if controller is set to Dual Channel Ramping Channel 2 4 16 Profile Programming Watlow Series FAS D Chapter Five Setup Setup Guidelines 0 0000 5 1 Parameter Setup Order 000000 5 1 Customizing the Main Page 5 2 Custom Main Page Parameter Record 5 3 Sample Application llle 5 4 Setup Page Map 0 c eee eee 5 6 Setup Page Parameter Table 5 7 Setup Page Parameter Record 5 16 Overview Setup Guidelines Setup Page parameters affect many areas of the This chapter presents information about configur controller s function ing the controller software through the Setup Page This is where you which parameters and functions are visible in other pages San ICES WNAI Nar Over ere puer cues the way the controller responds to your applica pins will be connected to tion and indicate how the inputs and outputs will func ES tion Some of the inputs outputs and functions Bud information ie displayed pn tne Main may not be visible depending on the model number of your controller Setting up the controller properly will provide a e choose Celsius or Fahrenheit scales sound foundation for settings in other pages make other choices ab
187. n look up parameter names in the Index which will direct you to earlier chapters in this book Watlow Series FAS D Communications 7 1 Series F4 Modbus Registers Parameters Sorted Alphabetically Register numbers listed are relative values To convert to absolute values add 40001 Registers for profiling parameters are in a separate section at the end of this list followed by a list of all M od bus registers in numerical order For more information about parameters see the Index 103 Power Output 1A Status 122 Alarm Silencing Alarm Output 2 r 0 to 100 expressed in 96 r w 0 No 107 Power Output 1B Status 1 Yes r 0 to 100 expressed in 716 Alarm Source Alarm Output 1 111 Power Output 2A Status r w 0 Input 1 r 0 to 100 expressed in 1 Input 2 115 Power Output 2B Status 2 Input 3 r 0 to 100 expressed in 96 733 Alarm Source Alarm Output 2 102 Alarm 1 Status rw 0 Input 1 r 1 Input 2 106 Alarm 2 Status 2 Input 3 r 702 Alarm Type Alarm Output 1 303 Alarm High Deviation Alarm 1 Value rw 0 Of rw 1 to 30000 ER bias alarm Haar Alarm 2 Valde 719 Alarm Type Alarm Output 2 303 Alarm High Set Point Alarm 1 Value he s r w lt per sensor gt to Alarm 1 Low Set Point 2 Devoto 322 Alarm High Set Point Alarm 2 Value r w lt per sensor gt to Alarm 2 Low Set Point 1902 Altitude Analog Input 2 703 Alarm Hysteresis Alarm Output 1 UN 1 RUN ft r w 1 to 30000 ap and above 720 Alarm Hysteresis Alarm Out
188. n 3 4 3 11 6 7 PID Autotune 3 4 3 11 6 7 Autotuning Channel x 2 8 3 4 5 7 B B amp B Converter 12 11 Battery A 2 Baud Rate 5 14 7 16 Boost Cool Digital Output Function 6 10 Boost Heat Digital Output Function 6 10 Boost Percent Power 5 13 6 10 Boost Time Delay 5 13 6 10 burst fire 6 6 heater life 6 6 noise generation RFI 6 6 sine wave 6 6 C Calibration overview 9 1 inputs 9 2 9 4 outputs 9 4 9 6 Calibration Offset 5 10 6 2 Cascade 6 11 7 3 Analog Input 3 5 10 Autotuning 3 6 cascade system 3 6 6 11 cascade system tuning 3 6 control selecting 3 6 inner loop 3 6 6 11 internal set point 6 11 long lag times 6 11 outer loop 3 6 6 11 overshoot 3 6 6 11 parameters 3 13 3 14 PID 6 11 setup 3 6 Cascade High Range Deviation 5 10 Process 5 10 Cascade Inner Loop 3 11 Cascade Low Range Deviation 5 10 Process 5 10 Cascade Outer Loop 3 11 CE Declaration of Conformity A 5 Ch2 Output Disable 5 9 changing and setting password 8 2 Channel 1 PID Set 4 15 Channel 2 PID Set 4 15 Channel x Autotune 3 11 Channel x Autotune Set Point 5 7 charts Custom Main Page 5 3 Operations Page Record 3 15 Setup Page Record 5 16 User Profile Record 4 7 Choose Cyde Time Control Output x 5 11 Choose Scaling 5 9 CJ Cx A to D Diagnostics 10 3 CJ Cx Temp Diagnostics 10 3 dear alarm key press simulation 3 4 7 3 dear error key press simulation 3 4 7 3 Clear Locks Set Lockout 8 3 closed loop configuration 3 1 closed lo
189. n is at 4100 and the number of the step being run is at 4101 All run addresses are read only Y NOTE For more information about how parameter settings affect the controller s operation see the Features Chapter 4012 r w 4012 r w Active Always Watlow Series FAS D Profile Programming 4 13 Profiles Page Parameter Table Modbus Register Range read write Parameter Description Modbus Value Default 1 O Set Ch Event Input x 1 to 4 Don t Wait 0 Don t Wait 0 d I rw Select whether or Welt for Off 1 Ris r e not to wait for a dig Wait for On 2 HE ju ital signal to initiate 4015 r w 3 this step 4106 r 3 4016 r w 4 4107 rw 4 Analog Input x 1 to 3 Don t Wait 0 Don t Wait 0 P r w t r r Select whether or Wait D 4023 rw Bi not to wait for a jl 4025 riw 3 process value to ini 4110 r 3 tiate this step Enter Analog Input x Range Low to Range Follow input High selected Select the process value that will initi ate this step 4022 4024 4026 Conditions for Parameters to Appear Input Active if the selected Event Input is Enabled Active if the selected Analog Input is present Analog Input 1 always is Analog Input x 1 to 3 gt Ramp Time or Ramp Rate or Soak Step gt Wait for gt To Wait for gt Analog Input x 1 to 3 r w r w r w Input Active Always n 2 3 Event Output gt Edit Step gt Step x 1 to 256 gt Ramp Time or R
190. nd test wiring short or open paths EIA 485 converter box may beincorrectly Check converter box wiring and its documen wired tation Computer communications port may bein Reconfigure computer s communications port correctly set up setup and verify that communications are okay e Communications software setup or address Check the communication card documentation may be incorrect for setable variables and operational testing Protocol or parity may be wrong should be Restart communications software and check 8 n 1 for settings agreement Verify the communica Application software not working properly tions bus is active e May need termination and pull up and pull e Verify operation with Watlow communications down resistors tool Alarms Alarm wont occur Alarm output may be off Configure output as an alarm Alarm set points may be incorrect Check alarm set points Alarm sides may be incorrect Check the alarm sides setting Controller may be in diagnostics mode Check the alarm type setting Alarm wont dear Alarm may be latched Move cursor to Check the alarm logic for compatibility with To clear the alarm cor alarm message Press system peripherals and annunciators rect the alarm condi Alarm set points may be incorrect Check the power limit setting tion If thealarmis X Alarm hysteresis may be incorrect Check the operation mode latched press with Input may bein error
191. ndredths o Channel 1 ressed in hundredths o Channel 1 pressed in hundredths o Channel 1 ressed in hundredths o Channel 1 pressed in hundredths o Channel 1 ressed in hundredths o Channel 2 ressed in hundredths o Channel 2 pressed in hundredths o Channel 2 pressed in hundredths o Channel 2 pressed in hundredths o Reset 2A PID Set 10 Channel 2 000 to 999 ex Reset 2B PID Set 6 pressed in hundredths o Channel 2 000 to 999 ex minutes minutes S minutes minutes minutes minutes minutes minutes minutes minutes minutes minutes minutes minutes minutes minutes minutes minutes minutes minutes minutes minutes minutes minutes minutes minutes minutes minutes minutes minutes minutes minutes minutes minutes minutes minutes minutes minutes pressed in hundredths per minutes 2562 r w 2572 r w 2582 r w 2592 r w 1601 1626 r w 1627 r w 1625 r w 1624 r w 1631 r w 1632 r w 1630 r w 1629 r w 709 r w 726 r w 25 681 r w 683 r w 685 r w 680 r w 682 r w 684 r w 712 r w 729 r w 601 r w Reset 2B PID Set 7 Channel 2 000 to 999 expressed in hundredths of minutes Reset 2B PID Set 8 Channel 2 000 to 999 expressed in hundredths of minutes Reset 2B PID Set 9 Channel 2 000 to 999 expressed in hundredths of minutes Reset 2B PID Set 10 Channel 2 000 to
192. nutes Set the derivative 0 to 999 0 time Rate x A or B 0 00 to 9 99 minutes 0 00 minutes Set the rate time 0 to 999 0 Dead Band x A or B 0 to 30000 0 Define the effective 0 to 30000 0 shift in the heating and cooling set points to prevent conflict NOTE For more information about how parameter settings affect the controller s operation see the Features Chapter 2623 2673 3 Band is not set to 0 2633 2683 4 2643 2693 5 r w 1A 1B Se Active if PI D Units Setup Page 2604 2654 1 isset to U S and Proportional 2614 2664 2 2624 2674 E Band is not set to 0 2634 2684 4 2644 2694 5 r w 1A 1B Set Active if Proportional Band is not 2605 2655 1 5615 2668 Set to 0 and one output is set to 2625 2675 3 heat and the other to cool 2635 2685 4 Setup Page 2645 2695 5 r w Watlow Series FAS D Operations 3 13 Operations Page Parameter Table Parameter Description Hysteresis x A or B Define the process variable change from the set point re quired to re energize the output in on off mode Range Modbus Value 1 to 30000 1 to 30000 Alarm Set Points Main gt Operations gt Alarm Set Points Alarm 1 Low SP Set low value at which alarm is trig gered Alarm 1 High SP Set high value at which alarm is trig gered Alarm 1 Low Deviation Set the deviation below set point 1 that will trigger an alarm Alarm 1 High Deviation Se
193. oller to the Factory Input is in error condition Check sensor connections and sensor wiring Input type may be set to wrong sensor or may nct be calibrated Power may be incorrect The open loop detect feature shows a broken sensor Corrective Action Check sensor connections Check sensor connections and sensor wiring Check the Sensor parameter to match the sensor hardware Measure power upstream for required level Check part number for power re quirements Check sensor function The Open Loop Detect parameter indicates it may be broken e The Calibration Offset parameter is set Check the Calibration Offset parameter much too high or low Input is in error condition Input 2 3 module in input 1 slot Input 1 module in input 2 3 slot Wrong module in retransmit 1 slot Wrong module in retransmit 2 slot Component failure Module changed Firmware upgrade Firmware upgrade Loss of power during memory setup Loss of power during memory setup Loss of power during memory setup Component failure Component failure loss of power during download value Set it to a lower level Check sensor connections Move module to correct input slot Move module to correct input slot Replace incorrect module with retransmit module Replace incorrect module with retransmit module Remove the module just installed and replace with a new module Press any key All parameters will de
194. ompressor Compressor On Power Compressor Off Power Compressor On Delay Compressor Off Delay Communications see Chapter 7 Baud Rate Address Custom Main Page P x Parameter 1 to 16 Factory Page see Chapters 8 9 10 Set Lockout Set Point Oper Autotune PID Oper Edit PID Oper Alarm SP Profile Setup Factory Change Password Clear Locks Diagnostic Model Mfg Date Serial Software Revision Inx 1 to 3 Out x 1A 1B 2A or 2B Retrans x 1 or 2 In x 1 to 3 AtoD CJC x 1 or 2 AtoD CJC x 1 or 2 Temp Line Freq Test Test Outputs Display Test Full Defaults Calibration Calibrate Input x 1 to 3 Calibrate Output x 1A 1B 2A or 2B ver eke Rexmit x 1 or Restore In x 1 to 3 Cal v NOTE Some parameters may not appear depending on the controller model and how it is configured Some menus may not appear if the controller has already been installed in equipment and the manufacturer has locked out portions of the software Watlow Series F4 Appendix A 17 How to Reach Us TOTAL CUSTOMER SATISFACTION 3YearWarranty Your Authorized Watlow Distributor United States headquarters Watlow Electric Manufacturing Company 12001 Lackland Road St Louis Missouri USA 63146 Telephone 1 314 878 4600 Fax 1 314 878 6814 Europe Watlow GmbH Industriegebiet Heidig Lauchwasenstr 1 Postfach 1165 Kronau 76709 Germany Telephone 49 7253 9400 0 Fax 49 7253 9400 44
195. on Main Page 0 No 1 Retransmit Output x 1 and 2 Main Setup Retransmit Output x 1 and 2 Retransmit Source Choose a source for retransmit signal Analog Range Select voltage or current range to retransmit Low Scale Set low end of cur rent or voltage Input 1 0 Input 2 1 Input 3 2 Set Point 1 3 Set Point 2 4 Channel 1 Power 5 Channel 2 Power 6 4 to 20mA 0 0 to 20mA 1 0 to 5V 2 1 to 5V 3 0 to 10V 4 Modbus Register read write Default I O Set Ch ALARMX 3200 3209 3210 3219 r w Off 0 Output 702 1 719 2 r w Off 0 Output 716 1 733 2 r w Alarm Self Output Clears 0 704 1 721 2 r w No 0 Output 705 1 722 2 r w 3 3 Output 703 1 720 2 r w Both 0 Output 706 1 723 2 r w Open on Output Alarm 0 707 1 724 2 Yes on Main 35 PE Page 0 7 5 2 r w Input 1 0 Output 709 1 726 2 r w 4 to 20mA 0 Output 836 1 837 2 r w 19999 to high scale 1 Low end of minimum sensor range 19999 to sensor 710 range 727 r w range to retransmit High Scale 1 v NOTE Press the Information Key for more task related tips Conditions for Parameters to Appear Active always Active always Active if the source is enabled Active if Alarm Output is enabled Active if Alarm Output is enabled Active if Alarm Output is enabled Active if Alarm Output is enabled Active if Alarm O
196. oost output is activated Use a positive value for heating a negative value for cooling To prevent the output from cycling and to extend hardware life define Boost Time Delay in seconds to set the minimum period of time that the output will remain off after an on cyde The Series F4 uses digital output 6 for boost heat and digital output 7 for boost cool Hysteresis for boost heat and cool is fixed at 596 Location in software Setup gt Digital Output x 6 or 7 Compressor Control The compressor control can save wear on a com pressor and prevent it from locking up from short cyding A bypass valve operated by a control output regulates how the process is cooled while a digital output switches the compressor on and off The Series F4 uses digital output 8 for compressor control Compressor On 96 Power sets the power level that will switch the compressor on Compres sor Off 96 Power sets the power level that will switch the compressor off The compressor will not turn on until the output power exceeds the Compressor On 96 Power for a time longer than the Compressor On Delay The compressor will not turn off until the output power exceeds the Compressor Off Power for a time longer than the Compressor Off Delay Location in software Setup Page Digital Output 8 100 85 B Boost Percent Power 85 Heat Power 0 Boost On Delay 30 Seconds On effi qs ail Boost Heat off Time In Seconds
197. op control see automatic operation CMC converter 12 11 communications 5 14 7 1 7 16 communications indicator light 2 2 Communications Menu 5 14 7 16 communications wiring A 8 Appendix Watlow Series FAS D B amp B converter 12 11 CMC converter 12 11 EI A 232 to EIA 485 conversion 12 11 EIA TIA 485 12 10 EIA TIA 232 12 10 termination for EIA 232 to EI A 485 converter 12 10 Complementary Output Digital Out put 5 Function 5 13 Compressor Control 6 10 Compressor Off 96 Power 5 14 6 10 Compressor Off Delay 5 14 6 10 Compressor On 96 Power 5 14 6 10 Compressor On Delay 5 14 6 10 Condition Digital Input x 5 11 conformity A 5 continue profile 3 3 Control Output Function 5 10 12 7 Control Output x Menu 3 5 5 11 controller overview 1 1 cooling compressor 6 10 creating a profile application 7 18 Current Date 5 7 Current Process Input Calibration 9 3 Current Time 5 7 cursor 2 2 Custom Main Page Menu 5 15 Custom Main Page Record 5 3 Custom Message 1 to 4 7 3 customizing the Main Page 5 2 Cyde Time 5 11 cyde time adjustment 3 5 D Dead Band 3 5 3 12 3 13 6 5 Cascade Inner Loop 3 12 Cascade Outer Loop 3 13 integral action 6 5 PID set 3 13 6 4 6 5 PID Set 1to5 3 12 PID Set 6to10 3 13 proportional action 6 5 Decimal 5 9 Dedaration of Conformity A 5 default Main Page parameters 2 3 2 8 Delete Profile 4 6 Delete Step 4 6 Derivative 3 11 3 12 3 13 derivative rate adjustment 3 5 deviation alarm 3 4 dia
198. ore the 15 000 or 240 000 input press once 6 For 1000 RTD enter 380 000 For 5000 or 1kQ RTD enter 6080 000 Allow at least 10 seconds to stabilize Press once at the Calibrate In put x 1 to 3 prompt At the 380 00 or 6080 000 prompt press once and to store the 380 000 or 6080 00Q input press once 7 Rewirefor operation and verify calibration The tenth character of your model number determines what prompts appear and what input resistance values to use for the RTD calibration 9 2 Calibration Watlow Series FAS D Voltage Process Input Procedure Equipment e Precision voltage source 0 to 10V minimum range with 0 001V resolution Input x 1 to 3 Setup and Calibration 1 Connect the correct power supply to terminals 1 2 and 3 see the Wiring Chapter and the Appendix Input 1 2 Connect the voltage source to terminals 59 and 62 of the controller 3 Enter 0 000V from the voltage source to the controller Allow at least 10 seconds to stabilize Press the Right Key once at the Calibrate Input 1 prompt At the 0 000V prompt press once and to store the 0 000V input press the Up Key once 4 Enter 10 000V from the voltage source to the controller Allow at least 10 seconds to stabilize Press onceat the Calibrate Input 1 prompt At the 10 000V prompt press once and to store the 10 000V input press once Input 2 5 Connect the voltage source to terminals 53
199. ore the step proceeds Digital inputs must first be configured in the Setup Page as Wait for E vents with the condition to be met also specified Then to wait for this digital input you must specify On meaning the condition as configured in the Setup Page or Off meaning the opposite of that condition Profile Plan Checklist 1 Configure the controller Setup Page to provide the right foundation for the profile Q Setthe appropriate input sensor ranges and limits Input Menus Q Establish digital inputs and outputs as events if required Digital Input and Output Menus Set the guaranteed soak band System Menu Dedide the controller response to a power out situation System M enu Choose Celsius or Fahrenheit System Menu scale If Setup Page values have not been recorded note them on the Setup Page Parameter Record in the Setup Chapter 2 Check the Operations Page Q If defaults are not acceptable establish PID values through the Autotune or Edit PID Menu Q Set the alarm se points Alarm Set Points Menu 3 Plan the profile on paper The User Pro file Record later in this chapter will give you a framework for your plan 4 Program the profile Make sure the User Profile Record is an accurate record of the program 5 Store the Setup Page Parameter Record along with the User Profile Record to document your programmed settings Watlow Series FAS D Profile Programming 4
200. otocol Safety and Agency Approvals e ULG C UL 916 listed File E185611 Process Control Equipment CE EMC to EN 61326 CE Safety to EN 61010 P65 and NEMA 4X Terminals Touch safe removable terminal blocks accepts 12 to 22 gauge wire Power 100 to 240V ac 15 41096 50 60Hz 5 e 24 to 28Vx ac dc 15 10 order option e 39VA maximum power consumption Data retention upon power failure via nonvolatile memory seven years for battery backed RAM Sensor input isolation from input to input to output to communication circuitry is 500V ac Operating Environment e 32 to 130 F 0 to 55 C 0 to 90 RH non condensing Storage temperature 40 to 158 F 40 to 70 C Accuracy Calibration accuracy and sensor conformity 0 1 of span 1 C 77 F 5 F 25 C 3 C ambient and rated line voltage 10 with the following exceptions Type T 0 12 of span for 200 C to 50 C Types R and S 0 15 of span for 0 C to 100 C Type B 0 24 of span for 870 C to 1700 C Accuracy span Less than or equal to operating ranges 1000 F 540 C minimum Temperature stability 0 1 F F 0 1 C C rise in ambient for thermocouples e 0 05 F F 0 05 C C rise in ambient for RTD sensors Displays Update rate 2 Hz Process 5 seven segment LED red Control interface display high definition LCD green Sensor Operating Ranges Type J 32 to 1500F or O to 815 C Type K 328 to 2500
201. ouple calibrator to 32 F 0 C e Precision millivolt source 0 to 50mV minimum range 0 002mV resolution Input x 1 to 3 Setup and Calibration 1 Connect the correct power supply to terminals 1 2 and 3 see the Wiring Chapter and the Appendix 2 Connect the millivolt source to Input 1 termi nals 62 and 61 Input 2 terminals 58 and 57 4 or Input 3 terminals 56 and 55 with copper wire 3 Enter 50 000mvV from the millivolt source Al low at least 10 seconds to stabilize Press the Right Key once at the Calibrate Input x 1 to 3 prompt Factory Page At the 50 00mV prompt press once and to store 50 00mV press the Up Key O once 4 Enter 0 000mV from the millivolt source Allow at least 10 seconds to stabilize At the 0 00mV prompt press once and to store 0 00mV press O once 5 Disconnect the millivolt source and connect the reference compensator or thermocouple calibra tor to Input 1 terminals 62 and 61 or In put 2 or 3 terminals 58 and 57 With type J thermocouple wire if using a compensator turn it on and short the input wires When us ing a typeJ calibrator set it to simulate 32 F 0 C Allow 10 seconds for the controller to sta bilize Press once at the Calibrate Input x 1 or 2 prompt Factory Page At the 32 F Type J prompt press once and to store type J ther mocouple calibration press once 6 Rewire for operation and verify calibration v
202. out the display of infor Pa rameter Setup Order mation on the Main Page and in the U pper LED Display and Initial configuration of the Series F4 is best done in set up computer communications with the con the following order troller 1 Go to the System Menu Setup Page Here you Many control features are explained in greater will indicate depth in the Features Chapter the current time and date To reach the Setup Page from the Main Page move preference of PID units U S Reset the cursor to Go to Setup then press the Right Rate or SI Integral Derivative Key preference of Celsius or Fahrenheit scales whether or not to display these units in the controller s U pper Display v NOTE v NOTE If the Series F4 is already installed in an environmental To see how all the pages menus and parameters are chamber oven furnace or other equipment most parame grouped see the software map on the inside back cover of ters will already be configured and access to the Setup this manual Page may be limited locked v NOTE For more information about how parameter settings affect the controller s operation see the Features Chapter Watlow Series F4S D Setup 5 1 the guaranteed soak band for each channel open loop detection warnings on or off and profile power outage actions 2 Gothe Setup Page and define all inputs out puts and alarms e Analog Input x 1 to 3 Digital Input x 1 to 4
203. ow side alarm It must be lower than the alarm high set point and higher than the low limit of the sensor range Location in software Operations Page gt Alarm Set Point gt Alarm x 1 or 2 Alarm Hysteresis An alarm state is triggered when the process value reaches the alarm high or alarm low set point Alarm hysteresis defines how far the process must return into the normal operating range before the alarm can be cleared Alarm hysteresis is a zone inside each alarm set point This zone is defined by adding the hysteresis value to the alarm low set point or subtracting the hysteresis value from the alarm high set point Location in software Setup Page gt Alarm Output x 1 or 2 Process or Deviation Alarms A process alarm uses one or two absolute set points to define an alarm condition A deviation alarm us es one or two set points that are defined relative to the control set point High and low alarm set points are calculated by adding and or subtracting offset values from the control set point If the set point changes the window defined by the alarm set points automatically changes with it In the Series F4 you must configure each alarm output as either a process or deviation alarm Location in software Setup Page gt Alarm Output x 1 or 2 Temperature High Side Alarm Range Alarm High Set Point y Alarm Hysteresis Normal Operating Range i Alarm Hysteresis Alarm Low Set Point Low Side Alarm Range
204. p End Idle Setpoint Channel 1 End Step End Idle Setpoint Channel 2 End Step Profile Number Current Status Profile Step Number Current Status Profile Step Type Current Status Profile Ramp Waiting Current Status Profile Waiting for Event 1 Current Status Profile Waiting for Event 2 Current Status Profile Waiting for Event 3 Current Status Profile Waiting for Event 4 Current Status Profile Waiting for Analog Input 1 Current Status Profile Waiting for Analog Input 2 Current Status Profile Waiting for Analog Input 3 Current Status Digital Output 1 Current Status Digital Output 2 Current Status Digital Output 3 Current Status Digital Output 4 Current Status Digital Output 5 Current Status Digital Output 6 Current Status Digital Output 7 Current Status Digital Output 8 Current Status Hours Remaining Ramp Time or Soak Step Current Profile Status Minutes Remaining Ramp Time or Soak Step Current Profile Status Seconds Remaining Ramp Time or Soak Step Current Profile Status Set Point Channel 1 Ramp Rate Ramp Time or Soak Step Current Profile Status Set Point Channel 2 Ramp Rate Ramp Time or Soak Step Current Profile Status Channel 1 PID Ramp Rate Ramp Time or Soak Step Current Profile Status Channel 2 PID Set Ramp Rate Ramp Time or Soak Step Current Profile Status Jump Count Current Profile Status Jump Profile Current Profile Status Jump Step Current Profile Status End Set Point C
205. ple Em e tion table to apply d 621 E toth o the sensor T 2 r w f E 3 N 4 CAUTION Changes to C 5 Sensor Type Units D 6 Decimals Scales and Set PT2 7 Point Limits will delete all a profiles stored in the F4 s B 10 memory If Sensor is set toRTD 1000 DIN or Wet Dry Bulb 11 for The tenth character of your 2 ns m 1000 RTD model number determines em gt models your RTD base resistance 5002 J IS 24 5002 DIN FA ___ 1to4 RG 1kQ DIN 25 23 for for 1000 1koJIS 26 500Q or f Sensor is set to 1kQ models Pio E 5 to 8 RG Process for 5002 and 1kQ 4 to 20mA 13 4to20mA Oto 20mA 14 13 O to 5V 15 1 to 5V 16 0 to 10V 17 0 to 50mV 18 If Analog Input 2 Sen sor is set to Process and Analog Input 2 is selected Vaisala 0 to 5V 19 Vaisala 0 to 10V 20 Vaisala 0 to 20mA 21 e Rotronics 0 to 5V 22 A wet bulb at input 2 uses the input 1 value to calculate the rel ative humidity on channel 2 The humidify and dehumidify out puts 2A and 2B are disabled when the input 1 temperature is too low 82 F 0 C or too high 212 F 100 C The relative humidi ty display in the Main Page will display RH Disabled for a low temperature error and RH Disabled for a high temperature error The Series F4 provides temperature compensation for the Vaisala HMM 30C Solid state Humidity Sensor to calculate rela tive humidity on channel 2 The humidify and dehum
206. process 3 ML Scale Low Depends on sensor and Input Aciveif Sensor Type is set to Set unit value for decimal point selec ta B Process low end of current or ton 684 3 voltage range r w Scale High Depends on sensor and Input Active if Sensor Type is set to Set unit value for decimal point selec a b Process high end of current tion 685 3 or voltage range r w Choose Scaling Normal Scaling 0 Normal 0 Input Active if Sensor Type is set to Select normal or ine Scale I nversion 1 a bi Process verse scaling Scale High corre sponds to the lowest Wa 3 process value and Scale Low corre sponds to the highest process value Ch2 Output Disable No 0 No 0 696 r w Active if Analog nput 2 Sensor Disables Channa 2 Yes 1 is set to Process and Units is outside the range set to rh and Analog Input 1 defined by Enter In1 Units is set to Temperature Temp Low and Enter In1 Temp High Enter In1 Temp Low Sensor range low to 697 r w Active if Ch2 Output Disable is Choose the lowest In1 Temp High 1 set to Yes temperature at which the channel 2 output is active Enter In1 Temp High Sensor range high to 698 r w Active if Ch2 Output Disable is Choose the highest In1 Temp Low 1 set to Yes temperature at which the channel 2 output is active Set Point Low Limit Depends on sensor Input Active Always except when Cas eap tmi formiris 602 1 cade is set to Process Cascade mum set point dos e o
207. pt press once Usethe Up Key O or the Down Key to adjust the display to the reading on the volt ammeter The controller should stabilize within one second Repeat until the volt amme ter reads 1 000V Press to store the value 7 Press the Right Key at the Calibrate Out put 1B prompt At the 10 000V prompt press once Use the Up Key O or the Down Key Q to adjust the display to the reading on the volt ammeter The controller should stabilize within one second Repeat until the volt amme ter reads 10 000V Press to store the value 8 Rewire for operation and verify calibration 9 4 Calibration Watlow Series F4S D Output 2A Setup and Calibration 1 Connect the correct power supply to terminals 1 2 and 3 see the Wiring Chapter and the Appendix Milliamperes 2 Connect the volt ammeter to terminals 36 4 and 37 3 Press the Right Key at the Calibrate Out put 2A prompt At the 4 000mA prompt press once Use the Up Key O or the Down Key O to adjust the display to the reading on the volt ammeter The controller should stabilize within one second Repeat until the volt amme ter reads 4 000mA Press to store the value 4 Press the Right Key at the Calibrate Out put 2A prompt At the 20 000mA prompt press once UsetheUp Key or the Down Key to adjust the display to the reading on the volt ammeter The controller should stabilize within one second Repeat until the volt amme
208. put 2 606 Analog Input 1 Decimal Point r w 1 to 30000 s 704 Alarm Latching Alarm Output 1 id 1 00 rw 0 Alarm Self clears 2 000 1 Alarm Latches 3 0000 721 Alarm Latching Alarm Output 2 616 Analog Input 2 Decimal Point rw 0 Alarm Self clears rw 0 0 1 Alarm Latches 1 00 707 Alarm Logic Alarm Output 1 2 000 r w 0 Open on Alarm 3 0000 1 c ose on Alarm 626 Analog Input 3 Decimal Point 724 Alarm Logic Alarm Output 2 r w 0 0 r w 0 Open on Alarm 1 00 1 Close on Alarm 2 000 302 Alarm Low Deviation Alarm 1 Value 3 0000 rw 19999 to 1 836 Analog Range Retransmit Output 1 321 Alarm Low Deviation Alarm 2 Value r w 0 4to20mA r w 19999 to 1 1 Oto 20mA 302 Alarm Low Set Point Alarm 1 Value 2 Oto SV r w lt per sensor gt to Alarm 1 High Set Point 3 1to5V 321 Alarm Low Set Point Alarm 2 Value 4 1to10V i rw per sensor to Alarm 2 High Set Point 837 Analog Range Retransmit Output 2 708 Alarm Messages Alarm Output 1 rw an Aui rw 0 Yes on Main Page 2 0 to 20m to 5V T nr 3 1to5V 725 Alarm Messages Alarm Output 2 4 1to10V Pw Q Yes on Main Page 305 Autotune Channel 1 1 No rw Tune Off 1308 Alarm Set Point Lockout 1 PID Set 1 r w O0 Full Access 2 PIDSet2 1 Read Only 3 PID Set 3 2 Password 4 PIDSet4 3 Hidden 5 PID Set 5 706 Alarm Sides Alarm Output 1 324 Autotune Channel 2 rw 9 aom r w Tune Off OW 1 PID Set6 2 High 2 PID Set7 723 Alarm Sides Alarm Output 2 3 PID Set 8 ee Er 1 Low e 2 High 343 Autotune Cascade 705 Alarm Silencing
209. put switch ing only at or near the zero voltage crossing points of the ac sine wave See burst fire zero switching See zero cross A 4 Appendix Watlow Series FAS D Declaration of Conformity Series F4 WATLOW Winona Inc 1241 Bundy Boulevard Winona Minnesota 55987 USA CE Declares that the following product Designation Series F4 Model Number s F4 S D or P H or L C E F or K A C E F or K A C For K A C F K 0 or 6 0 1 or 2 Any three letters or numbers Temperature control Installation Category Il Pollu tion degree 2 Rated Voltage 100 to 240 V ac or 24 to 28 V ac or dc Rated Frequency 50 or 60 Hz Rated Power Consumption 39 VA maximum English Classification Meets the essential requirements of the following European Union Directives by using the relevant standards show below to indicate compliance 89 336 EEC Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive EN 61326 1997 With A1 1998 Electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use EMC requirements Industrial Immunity Class A Emissions EN 61000 4 2 1996 With A1 1998 Electrostatic Discharge Immunity EN 61000 4 3 1997 Radiated Field Immunity EN 61000 4 4 1995 Electrical Fast Transient Burst Immunity EN 61000 4 5 1995 With A1 1996 Surge Immunity EN 61000 4 6 1996 Conducted Immunity EN 61000 4 11 1994 Voltage Dips Short Interruptions and Voltage Variations Immunity EN 61000
210. r Deviation Cascade this is EAN 3 masked for Analog Input 1 v NOTE For more information about how parameter settings affect the con troller s operation see the Features Chapter Watlow Series F4S D Setup 5 9 Setup Page Parameter Table Parameter Description Set Point High Limit Set limit for maxi mum set point Calibration Offset Compensate for sen sor errors or other factors Filter Time Set the filter time for input in seconds Error Latch Select whether error clear is automatic or manual Cascade Select whether to use the cascade algorithm Cascade Low Range Process Cascade High Range Process Cascade Low Range Deviation Cascade High Range Deviation Range Modbus Value Depends on sensor 19999 to 30000 60 0 to 60 0 600 to 600 Self Clear 0 Latch 1 No Cascade 0 Process Cascade 1 Deviation Cascade 2 Depends on sensor and decimal point selec tion Depends on sensor and decimal point selec tion Depends on sensor and decimal point selec tion Depends on sensor and decimal point selec tion Digital Input x 1 to 4 Main Setup Digital Input x 1 to 4 Name Name the input for easy reference v NOTE selected by user ASCII Values Press the Information Key for more task related tips Default 0 0 0 1 0 if Decimal is set to 0 0 and Sensor Type is set to Thermo couple or RTD 10 Self Clear
211. r Off Delay Communications Menu Setting Baud Rate Address 5 16 Setup Watlow Series F4S D Chapter Six Features Inputs Calibration Offset 0005 6 2 Filter Time Constant 005 6 2 Set Point Low Limit and High Limit 6 3 High Scale and Low Scale 6 3 Evento are sun A Ieri e a A Bates Se 6 3 Reiransmit 2 cuceEl Eder RUE 6 3 Control Methods On Off Control 0 0000 6 4 Proportional Control 00005 6 4 PI Control ints eka ee ate Vereen 6 5 PID Control ue eere tectus 6 5 Dead Band leen 6 5 Multiple PID Sets 00005 6 6 Burst Flte ces puri Pace a DEAE 6 6 Other Features Autotuning 000 eee 6 7 Power Out Time Action 005 6 7 Alarms Alarm Set Points 00000 ee 6 8 Alarm Hysteresis 00 00 ee eee 6 8 Process or Deviation Alarms 6 8 Alarm Latching 0c eee aes 6 9 Alarm Silencing lisse 6 9 Alarm Sides 0 00 cece eee ees 6 9 Advanced Features Boost Heat and Boost Cool 6 10 Compressor Control 000 eau 6
212. r w 2520 r w 2530 r w 2540 r w 2550 r w 2560 r w 2570 r w 2580 r w 2590 r w 2604 r w 2614 r w 2624 r w 2634 r w 2644 r w 504 r w 514 r w 524 r w 534 r w 544 r w 2654 r w 2664 r w 2674 r w 2684 r w 2694 r w 554 r w 564 r w Proportional Band 1A PID Set 5 Channel 1 0 to 30000 Proportional Band 1B Cascade PID Set 1 Channel 1 0 to 30000 Proportional Band 1B Cascade PID Set 2 Channel 1 0 to 30000 Proportional Band 1B Cascade PID Set 3 Channel 1 0 to 30000 Proportional Band 1B Cascade PID Set 4 Channel 1 0 to 30000 Proportional Band 1B Cascade PID Set 5 Channel 1 0 to 30000 Proportional Band 1B PID Set 1 Channel 1 0 to 30000 Proportional Band 1B PID Set 2 Channel 1 0 to 30000 Proportional Band 1B PID Set 3 Channel 1 0 to 30000 Proportional Band 1B PID Set 4 Channel 1 0 to 30000 Proportional Band 1B PID Set 5 Channel 1 0 to 30000 Proportional Band 2A PID Set 6 Channel 2 0 to 30000 Proportional Band 2A PID Set 7 Channel 2 0 to 30000 Proportional Band 2A PID Set 8 Channel 2 0 to 30000 Proportional Band 2A PID Set 9 Channel 2 0 to 30000 Proportional Band 2A PID Set 10 Channel 2 0 to 30000 Proportional Band 2B PID Set 6 Channel 2 0 to 30000 Proportional Band 2B PID Set 7 Channel 2 0 to 30000 Proportional Band 2B PID Set 8 Channel 2 0 to 30000 Proportional Band 2B PID Set 9 Channel 2 0 to 30000 Proportional Band 2B PID Set 10 Channel 2 0 to 30000 Rat
213. r was interrupted Hold hold the profile at the point that power was interrupted Termi nate stop the profile using the End step condi tions Reset restart the profile from Step 1 Idle stop the profile and transfer to an idle setpoint Location in software Setup Page gt System gt Pow er Out Time gt Power Out Action Process Set Point rhe Auto tune is complete PID control Auto tune begins on off control Auto tune Set Point Default is 90 of process set point Temperature Time Figure 6 7 Autotuning v NOTE For manual tuning see the Operations Chapter v NOTE The Power Out Action occurs only if a profile was run ning when the power went out If a profile was on hold it will return to its Hold status when the power returns Watlow Series FAS D Features 6 7 Alarms Alarms are activated when the process value or temperature leaves a defined range A user can configure how and when an alarm is triggered what action it takes and whether it turns off auto matically when the alarm condition is over Configure alarm outputs in the Setup Page before setting alarm set points Alarm Set Points The alarm high set point defines the process value or temperature that will trigger a high side alarm It must be higher than the alarm low set point and lower than the high limit of the sensor range The alarm low set point defines the temperature that will trigger a l
214. ransmit Outputs optional 8 Digital Outputs Inputs and Outputs Watlow Series FAS D Introduction 1 1 Overview Andy an engineer with the Ajax Testing Company is running tempera ture and humidity tests on navigation al equipment He wants to be able to control temperature and humidity in the environmental chamber and moni tor the temperature of the equipment itself With the Watlow Series F 4 ramp ing controller he can program the test as a ramping profile and control it remotely use boost heat and cool to maintain precise temperatures record the equipment temperature on a chart recorder notify the operator with a bell if pro cess temperatures do not follow the profile pause the profile if someone opens the chamber door during the test set up communications with a PC later 1 2 Introduction Sample Application Environmental Testing with a Dual Channel F4 Using Multiple Inputs and Outputs 1 Wire Following diagrams in the user manual Andy connected the analog input terminals to temper ature and humidity sensors channel 1 output terminals to the heater and cooler channel 2 outputs to the humidifier dehumidifier alarm output 1 to an alarm bell and retransmit output 1to a chart recorder to track the equipment temperature Digital output 6 and 7 controlled the boost heater and cooler and 8 controlled the mechanical refrigeration compressor
215. rapides Rafale EN 61000 4 5 1995 avec A1 1996 Immunit contre les surtensions EN 61000 4 6 1996 Immunit conduite EN 61000 4 11 1994 Immunit contre les carts de tension interruptions courtes et variations de tension EN 61000 3 2 1995 avec A1 3 1999 Emissions de courant harmoniques EN 61000 3 3 1995 avec A1 1998 Fluctuations et vacillements de tension Directive 73 23 CEE sur les basses tensions EN 61010 1 1993 avec A1 1995 Normes de s curit du mat riel lectrique pour la mesure le contr le et l utilisation en laboratoire 1 re partie Condi tions g n rales 2250 Erklart dass das folgende Produkt Deutsch Bezeichnung Serie F4 Modell Nummern F4 S D oder P H or L C E F oder K A C E F oder K A C F or K A C F K O oder 6 0 1 oder 2 Beliebige drei Ziffern oder Buchstaben Temperaturregler Installationskategorie II Ver schmutzungsgrad 2 Klassifikation Nennspannung 100 bis 240 V ac oder 24 bis 28 V ac oder dc Nennfrequenz 50 oder 60 Hz Nennstromverbrauch Max 39 VA Erf llt die wichtigsten Normen der folgenden Anweisung en der Europ ischen Union unter Verwendung des wichtigsten Abschnitts bzw der wichtigsten Abschnitte die unten zur Befolgung aufgezeigt werden 89 336 EEC Elektromagnetische Kompatibilitatsrichtlinie EN 61326 1997 mit A1 1998 Elektrisches Ger t f r Messung Kontrolle und Laborgebrauch EMV Anforderungen St rfestigkeit Indust
216. riebereich Klasse A Emissionen EN 61000 4 2 1996 mit A1 1998 St rfestigkeit gegen elektronische Entladung EN 61000 4 3 1997 St rfestigkeit gegen Strahlungsfelder EN 61000 4 4 1995 St rfestigkeit gegen schnelle St6Be Burst EN 61000 4 5 1995 mit A1 1996 St rfestigkeit gegen berspannung EN 61000 4 6 1996 Geleitete St rfestigkeit EN 61000 4 11 1994 St rfestigkeit gegen Spannungsabfall kurze Unterbrechungen und Spannungsschwankungen EN 61000 3 2 1995 mit A1 3 1999 Harmonische Stromemissionen EN 61000 3 3 1995 mit A1 1998 Spannungsfluktationen und Flimmern EN 61000 3 3 1995 Grenzen der Spannungsschwankungen und Flimmern 73 23 EEC Niederspannungsrichtlinie EN 61010 1 1993 mit A1 1995 Sicherheitsanforderungen f r elektrische Ger te f r Messungen Kontrolle und Laborgebrauch Teil 1 Allgemeine Anforderungen Declara que el producto siguiente Designaci n Serie F4 N meros de modelo F4 S Do P H or L C E Fo K A C E Fo K A C F o K A C F K 00 6 0 10 2 Cualesquiera tres letras o n meros Control de temperatura Categoria de instalaci n Il Grado de contaminaci n 2 Tensi n nominal 100 a 240 V CA o 24 a 28 V x CA o CD Frecuencia nominal 50 o 60 Hz Consumo nominal de energ a 39 VA m ximo Espa ol Clasificaci n Cumple con los requisitos esenciales de las siguientes Directrices de la Uni n Eu ropea mediante el uso de las normas aplicables que se muestran
217. rite any value 331 Clear Alarm 2 Key Press Simulation w write any value 311 Clear Error 1 Key Press Simulation w write any value 330 Clear Error 2 Key Press Simulation w write any value 349 Clear Error 3 Key Press Simulation w write any value 1315 Clear Locks 0 yes 2046 Complementary Output Digital Output 5 0 1A 1 1B 2 2A 3 2B 2073 Compressor Off Power Digital Output 8 r w Compressor On Power to 100 2075 Compressor Off Delay Digital Output 8 r w 0 to 9999 seconds 2072 Compressor On Power Digital Output 8 r w 100 to 100 expressed in percent 2074 Compressor On Delay Digital Output 8 rw 1 to 9999 seconds Control Output Calibration see Process Output Calibration 700 Control Output 1A Function rw 1 Heat 2 Cool 717 r w 734 r w 751 r w 1920 r w 1919 r w 1921 r w 1916 r w 1917 r w 1918 r w 1400 15 r w 4501 18 r w 4521 38 r w 4541 58 r w 4561 78 r w 509 r w 506 r w 559 r w 556 r w 2509 r w 2506 r w 2559 Control Output 1B Function 0 Off 1 Heat 2 Cool Control Output 2A Function nee V NOTE 2 Cool 1 Control Output 2B Function POCHI inf ormation about parameters see the Index 1 Heat 2 Cool Current Date Day 1to31 Current Date Month 1to 12 Current Date Year 1998 to 2035 Current Time Hour 0023 Current Time Minutes 0 to 59 Current Time Seconds 0 to 59 Custom Main Page Parameters P1 to P16 None Input Value Input 2 Value Input 2 Val
218. rm 2 High Deviation 3 14 Alarm 2 High SP 3 14 Alarm 2 Low Deviation 3 14 Alarm 2 Low SP 3 14 alarm band example 5 5 alarm dearing 3 4 Alarm High Set Point 3 4 Alarm Hysteresis 5 12 6 8 Alarm Latching 5 12 6 9 Alarm Logic 5 12 Alarm Low Set Point 3 4 alarm messages 3 8 Alarm Messages 5 12 Alarm Name 5 12 alarm output indicator lights 2 2 Alarm Output x Menu 5 12 Alarm Set Point Menu 3 14 alarm set points 3 4 3 14 6 8 8 3 Alarm Sides 5 12 6 9 7 2 Alarm Silencing 5 12 6 9 Alarm Source 5 12 alarm status indicator lights 2 2 Alarm Type 5 12 alarms deviation 3 4 6 8 features 6 8 6 9 operation 3 4 process 3 4 6 8 self dearing 6 9 troubleshooting 3 8 Altitude 5 9 Alternating Display 5 15 ambient temperature A 6 Analog Input x A To D Diagnostics 10 3 Calibration Offset 5 10 Decimal 5 9 7 2 Deviation Cascade High Range 5 10 Deviation Cascade Low Range 5 10 Error Latch 5 10 Filter Time 5 10 Open Loop 5 7 Process Cascade High Range 5 10 Process Cascade Low Range 5 10 Sensor 5 8 Type 5 8 Units 5 9 Wait for 4 14 Analog Input x Menu 5 8 Analog Range Retransmit Output 5 12 Automatic Operation 3 1 automatic tuning 3 5 3 6 Autostart Menu 4 2 4 12 Date 4 12 Day 4 12 Time 4 12 Autostart Profile Date Or Day 4 12 autostart step application 7 19 Autotune selecting set points 3 4 Autotune PI D Cascade Menu 3 11 Autotune PID Menu 3 4 3 5 3 11 autotuning 3 4 3 5 6 7 cascade 3 6 lockout 8 3 operatio
219. s 11 2a Gasket Seated on the Bezel 11 2b Retention Collar and Mounting Bracket 11 3a Tightening the Screws suss 11 3b Disengaging the Mounting Bracket 11 3c Chapter 12 Isolation Blocks 0 000 eee eee eee ee 12 1 Power Wiring 00 e eee eee eee 12 2 Input 1 Thermocouple lesse 12 3a Input 1 RTD 2 or 3 Wire 100 Q Platinum 12 3b Input 1 0 to 5V 1 to 5V or 0 to 10V Process12 3c Input 1 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA Process 12 3d Input 1 O to 50mV 2000 0 eae 12 3e Input 2 amp 3 Thermocouple 12 4a Input 2 amp 3 RTD 2 wire 1000 Platinum 12 4b Input 2 amp 3 RTD 3 wire 1000 Platinum 12 4c In 2 amp 3 0 to 5V 1 to 5V or 0 to 10V Process12 5a Input 2 and 3 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA Process 12 5b Input 2 amp 3 O to 50mV 2 12 5c Digital Inputs 1 to4 0 eee eee eee 12 6 Output x Solid state Relay 12 7a Output x Switched DC Open Collector 12 7b Output x 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA 0 to 5V 1 to 5V and 0 to 10V dc Process 12 8a Retransmit Outputs 1 and 2 12 8b Alarm Outputs 1 and 2 000 00 00s 12 8c Digital Outputs 1t08 0 0 eee eee 12 9a Digital Output Open Collector Example 12 9b Digital Output Switched DC Example 12 9c EIA TIA 485 and
220. s Active if Alarm 1 Type Setup Page is set to Deviation Active if decimal is set to 0 0 Active if Alarm 1 Type Setup Page is set to Deviation Active if decimal is set to 0 0 Active if Alarm 2 Type Setup Page is set to Process Active if Alarm 2 Type Setup Page is set to Process Active if Alarm 2 Type Setup Page is set to Deviation Active if decimal is set to 0 0 Active if Alarm 2 Type Setup Page is set to Deviation 3 14 Operations Watlow Series F4S D Operations Page Parameter Record Make a photocopy of this page and enter your settings on that copy Name Date PID Set Chan 1 Menu or Cascade Inner Loop PID Set 1 PID Set 2 PID Set 3 PID Set 4 PID Set 5 Proportional Band A IntegralA ResetA DerivativeA RateA Dead Band A Hysteresis A Proportional Band B IntegralB ResetB DerivativeB RateB Dead Band B Hysteresis B PID Set Chan 2 Menu PID Set 6 PID Set 7 PID Set 8 PID Set 9 PID Set 10 Proportional Band A IntegralA ResetA DerivativeA RateA Dead Band A Hysteresis A Proportional Band B IntegralB ResetB DerivativeB RateB Dead Band B Hysteresis B Cascade Outer Loop PID Set 1 PID Set 2 PID Set 3 PID Set 4 PID Set 5 Proportional Band A IntegralA ResetA DerivativeA RateA Dead Band A Proportional
221. s Test 2507 Hysteresis 2A PID Set 6 Channel 2 2612 Reset 1A Cascade PID Set 2 Channel 1 1515 Line Frequency Diagnostics 2509 Cycle Time type Control Output 2A 2613 Derivative 1A Cascade PID Set 2 Channel 1 1531 CJC2 Temp Diagnostics 2510 Proportional Band 2A PID Set 7 Channel 2 2614 Rate 1A Cascade PID Set 2 Channel 1 1532 CJC2 AtoD Diagnostics 2511 Integral 2A PID Set 7 Channel 2 2615 Dead Band 1A Cascade PID Set 2 Channel 1 1601 Restore Factory Calibration 2512 Reset 2A PID Set 7 Channel 2 2617 Hysteresis 1A Cascade PID Set 2 Channel 1 1602 Full Defaults 2513 Derivative 2A PID Set 7 Channel 2 2620 Proportional Band 1A Cascade PID Set 3 1603 Input 1 Calibrate 2514 Rate 2A PID Set 7 Channel 2 Channel 1 1604 Process Output 1A 4 000mA Calibrate 2515 Dead Band 2A PID Set 7 Channel 2 2621 Integral 1A Cascade PID Set 3 Channel 1 1605 Process Output 1A 20 000mA Calibrate 2517 Hysteresis 2A PID Set 7 Channel 2 2622 Reset 1A Cascade PID Set 3 Channel 1 1606 Process Output 1A 1 000V Calibrate 2520 Proportional Band 2A PID Set 8 Channel 2 2623 Derivative 1A Cascade PID Set 3 Channel 1 1607 Process Output 1A 10 000V Calibrate 2521 Integral 2A PID Set 8 Channel 2 2624 Rate 1A Cascade PID Set 3 Channel 1 1608 Input 2 Calibrate 2522 Reset 2A PID Set 8 Channel 2 2625 Dead Band 1A Cascade PID Set 3 Channel 1 1609 Process Output 1B 4 000mA Calibrate 2523 Derivative 2A PID Set 8 Channel 2 2627 Hysteresis
222. s 6 6 PID Units 5 1 5 7 PID values defaults 3 4 Power Out Condition 4 3 power wiring 12 2 Power Out Action 5 7 Power Out Time 5 7 Process Display 5 15 process input range limits process input wiring 12 2 process or deviation alarms 3 4 6 8 Process Output Calibration 7 7 9 4 Output 1 Calibration 7 7 9 4 Output 2 Calibration 7 7 9 4 Process Control Output x 5 11 ProfileAction Menu 3 3 profile control 3 2 5 10 profile indicator light 2 2 Profile Key 2 4 3 2 3 3 hold a profile 3 3 resume a profile 3 3 run a profile 3 2 start a profile 3 2 terminate a profile 3 3 profilelockout 7 8 8 1 profile mode 3 2 profile number 7 12 profile plan checklist 4 3 profile programming editing a profile 4 6 frequently asked questions 4 10 Modbus flowcharts 7 17 7 26 new profile 4 4 overview 4 1 procedures 7 17 7 26 Profiles Page parameters 4 12 4 16 sample profile 4 8 4 9 step types 4 2 4 3 4 12 4 16 User Profile Record 4 7 profile Modbus registers 7 10 7 12 Profile Status message 3 2 profile wait for analog input x or event x 4 13 profile defined 4 2 Profiles Page 4 4 create profile 4 4 edit profile 4 6 map 4 11 programming new profile 4 4 4 5 Proportional Band x 6 4 adjustment 3 5 Cascade Inner Loop 3 11 Cascade Outer Loop 3 13 PID Set 1to5 3 11 PID Set 6to 10 3 12 proportional control 6 4 droop 6 4 proportional plus integral PI control 6 5 droop 6 5 integral 6 5 overshoot 6 5 reset 6 5 proportional plus integra
223. s A 6 Static Message 5 15 static set point 3 1 step types 4 2 4 3 Autostart 4 2 End 4 3 Jump 4 3 Ramp Rate 4 2 Ramp Time 4 2 Soak 4 3 stop bit 3 9 system errors 3 9 System Menu 3 4 5 7 Systeme Internationale SI 5 1 T technical assistance ii temperature scale F or C 5 1 5 7 terminals A 6 terminate profile 3 3 test menu map 10 1 Test Outputs 10 1 10 4 thermocouple 5 8 A 6 thermocouple compensator 9 2 thermocouple input calibration 9 2 wiring 12 2 12 4 Time 4 13 time setting current 5 1 transformer isolation 12 1 U U S units 5 1 5 7 Units Analog Input 5 9 input measurement 5 9 PID 5 7 SI U S 5 1 5 7 upper display 2 2 use password 8 2 user ramp chart 4 7 V Vaisala 5 5 5 8 values enter 2 5 Variable Burst Cycle Time 5 10 voltage process input calibration 9 3 W wait for event 4 3 warranty ii wet bulb 5 8 wiring example 12 12 wiring overview 12 1 X Y Z zero cross switching 6 6 heater life 6 6 noise generation RFI 6 6 sine wave 6 6 A 12 Appendix Watlow Series FAS D Chapter 1 Single Channel Series F4 Inputs Outputs 1 1a Dual Channel Series F4 Inputs Outputs 1 1b Sample Application Environmental Testing 1 2 1 3 Chapter 2 Series F4 Displays and Indicator Lights 2 2 Default Main Page Parameters 2 8 Series F4 Keys and Navigation 2 4 How to Enter Numbers and Names 2 6 The Informat
224. s of life use National Electric Code NEC standard wiring practices to install and operate the Series F4 Failure to do so could result in such damage and or injury or death Communications Wiring Figure 12 10a EIA TIA 485 and EIA TIA 232 Communications EIA TIA 485 EIA TIA 232 um oon coon noon mmn muononr 5V4 termi nation bias 11 EREEEEER RE ce bh OF 6 8 Z 9L Sk vb Sb Converter box termination with pull up and pull down resistors If the system does not work properly it may need termination resistors at each end of the network A typical installation would require a 120 ohm resistor across the transmit receive terminals 12 and 13 of the last controller in the network and the converter box or serial card Pull up and pull down 1k resistors may be needed on the first unit to maintain the correct voltage during the idle state Figure 12 10c EIA TIA 232 Connections 14 16 15 14 16 15 X X L Wire DB 9 DB25 Color Connector Connector TX Pin 14 RXPin2 RXPin3 Red RX Pin 15 TX Pin 3 TX Pin 2 Black GNDPin16 GndPin5 GND Pin7 GNDPin24 N UPin9 N U Pin 22 Shield GndPin5 GndPin7 12 10 Wiring Watlow Series FAS D A WARNING To avoid damage to property and equipment and or injury of loss of life use National Electric Code NEC standard wiring practices to install and operate the Series
225. s of Modbus registers contain profile information In edit mode the number of the profile being edit ed is at 4000 and the number of the step being edited is at 4001 When the profile is running the number of the pro file being run is at 4100 and the number of the step being run is at 4101 All run addresses are read only Y NOTE For more information about how parameter settings affect the controller s operation see the Features Chapter Watlow Series F4S D Profile Programming 4 15 Profiles Page Parameter Table Range Modbus Value Default Parameter Description Modbus Register read write VO Set Ch Conditions for Parameters to Appear Idle Main gt Profiles gt Edit Profile gt Profile x 1 to 40 gt Edit Step Step x 1 to 256 gt Step gt End gt Idle Enter Channel 1 Idle Set Set Point 1 Low Limit 75 75 Point to Set Point 1 High Limit Select the channel 1 set point to be main tained after the pro file ends Enter Channel 2 Idle Set Set Point 2 Low Limit 75 75 to Set Point 2 High Limit Point Select the channel 2 set point to be main tained after the pro file ends Y NOTE Two sets of Modbus registers contain profile informa tion In edit mode the number of the profile being edited is at 4000 and the number of the step being edited is at 4001 When the profile is running the number of the profile being run is at 4100 and the number of the step being run is at 4101 All ru
226. s the pro file steps automatically in sequence As many as 40 different profiles and a total of 256 steps can be stored in the Series F 4 s non volatile memory The 256 steps are grouped by profile So one pro file could have 256 steps or 39 profiles could have 6 steps and one could have 22 or 32 profiles could have eight steps each The maximum number of steps is 256 and the maximum number of profiles is 40 Temperature Time Figure 4 2 An eight step profile as it might be logged on a chart recorder Step Types Building Blocks of Profiles Six types of steps are available in the Series F 4 They are the building blocks of ramping profiles Usethe six step types to create simple or complex profiles involving all inputs and outputs The Se ries F4 prompts you to define each step s proper ties listed below Autostart Ramp Time Ramp Rate Soak e Jump End Autostart Autostart pauses a profile until the specified date or day and time of a 24 hour dock Define the Au tostart by choosing 1 Day of the week or Date 2 Time Note To invoke an Autostart step in a profile you must activate the profile via the Profile Key and se lect the Autostart step Ramp Time Ramp Time changes the set point to a new value in a chosen period of time Ramp Time is the same for both channels of a dual channel controller Define the Ramp Time step by choosing 1 Wait for an event or process va
227. s value is within the dead band Integral action continues to bring the process temperature to the set point When the dead band value is zero the heating de ment activates when the temperature drops bel ow the set point and the cooling element switches on when the temperature exceeds the set point Location in software Operations Page gt Edit PID 2PID Set Channel x 10r 2 2 PID Set x 1 to 5 or 6 to 10 Temperature Temperature Temperature Set Point Droopf Proporiona Band Droop corrected Time Figure 6 5a Proportional Plus Integral Control Reduced Overshoot Set Point Proportional Band Proportional Band x 2 Heating slows Time Figure 6 5b PID Control 4 Cooling Proportional Band Cooling Set Point Cooling Dead Ba Heating Set Point Heating Proportional Band Time Figure 6 5c Cooling Dead Band Watlow Series FAS D Features 6 5 Multiple PID Sets The Series F4 has five PID sets available for each channel sets 1 to 5 for Channel 1 and sets 6 to 10 for Channel 2 allowing optimal performance under different conditions loads and temperatures In the Static Set Point mode PID Set 1 is used for Chan nel 1 and PID Set 6 is used for Channel 2 control When programming a profile you can assign differ ent sets to each Ramp step and Soak step A PID set includes proportional integral and derivative settings for outputs A and B It also i
228. se the equipment in the chamber to a temperature of 105 F and an RH of 59 for three hours Steps 13 to 19 Ramp Time The test calls for a programmed decrease in temperature and increase in relative humidity over a period of seven hours Step 20 Jump J ump to step 3 and repeat steps 3 to 20 twenty times Step 21 End End the profile and turn off all outputs 4 8 Profile Programming Watlow Series F4S D Step Step Date Day Wait Set Events Time Rate Set Set PID Guar Jump to Step Repeats End Nmbr Type Time for 123 45 6 7 8 HMS Pt 1 Pt2 Set Soak Profile Step 1 Ramp Time 1 sec 88 F 88 2 Soak Process 1 amp 2 1 sec 3 Soak 5 hrs 4 Ramp Time 1 hr 90 F 85 5 Ramp Time 1 hr 93 F 80 6 Ramp Time 1 hr 96 F 76 7 Ramp Time 1 hr 98 F 73 8 Ramp Time 1 hr 100 F 69 9 Ramp Time 1 hr 102 F 65 10 jRamp Time 1 hr 104 F 62 11 Ramp Time 1 hr 105 F 59 12 Soak Process 1 amp 2 3 hrs 13 Ramp Time 1 hr 102 F 6596 14 Ramp Time 1 hr 99 F 6996 15 Ramp Time 1 hr 97 F 73 16 Ramp Time 1 hr 94 F 79 17 Ramp Time 1 hr 91 F 85 18 Ramp Time 1 hr 90 F 8596 19 jRamp Time 1 hr 89 F 8896 20 Jump 3 20 21 End All Off Figure 9a Profile Chart for Military Standard 810D Test 106 mm w m m M Temperature F O 88 Relative Humidity 104 Dual Channel F4D 102 100 ue E
229. t PID Lockout 0 Full Access 1 Read Only 2 Password 3 Hidden Error Latching Analog Input 1 0 Self Clear 1 Latch Error Latching Analog Input 2 0 Self Clear 1 Latch Error Latching Analog Input 3 0 Self Clear 1 Latch Factory Page Lockout Full Access 1 Read Only 2 Password Filter Time Analog Input 1 600 to 600 expressed in tenths of seconds Filter Time Analog Input 2 600 to 600 expressed in tenths of seconds Filter Time Analog Input 3 600 to 600 expressed in tenths of seconds Full Defaults 800 yes Guaranteed Soak Band Channel 1 1 to 9999 Guaranteed Soak Band Channel 2 1 to 9999 Guaranteed Soak Band 1 Source 0 Input 1 1 Input2 2 Input 3 Guaranteed Soak Band 2 Source 0 Input 1 1 Input 2 2 Input 3 High Power Limit Control Output 1A Low Limit 1 to 100 expressed in High Power Limit Control Output 1B Low Limit 1 to 100 expressed in Watlow Series F4S D Communications 7 5 748 r w 765 r w 711 r w 728 r w 2607 r w 2617 r w 2627 r w 2637 r w 2647 r w 507 r w 517 r w 527 r w 537 r w 547 r w 2657 r w 2667 r w 2677 r w 2687 r w 2697 r w 557 r w 567 r w 577 r w 587 r w 597 r w 2507 r w 2517 r w 2527 r w 2537 r w 2547 r w 2557 r w 2567 r w 2577 r w 2587 r w 2597 r w 308 r w 327 r w 1504 101 903 r w 210 High Power Limit Control Output 2A Low Limit 1 to 100 expressed in High Power Limit Control Output 2B Low Limit 1
230. t the deviation above set point 1 that will trigger an alarm Alarm 2 Low SP Set low value at which alarm is trig gered Alarm 2 High SP Set high value at which alarm is trig gered Alarm 2 Low Deviation Set the deviation below set point 2 that will trigger an alarm Alarm 2 High Deviation Set the deviation above set point 2 that will trigger an alarm lt per sensor gt to Alarm 1 High Set Point lt per sensor gt to Alarm 1 Low Set Point 19999 to 1 1 to 19999 1 to 1999 9 1 to 19999 1 to 30000 1 to 30000 1 to 3000 0 1 to 30000 lt per sensor gt to Alarm 2 High Set Point lt per sensor gt to Alarm 2 Low Set Point 19999 to 1 1 to 19999 1 to 1999 9 1 to 19999 0 to 30000 0 to 30000 Default 3 3 lt per sensor gt per sensor gt 999 999 99 9 999 999 999 99 9 999 per sensor gt per sensor gt 999 999 99 9 999 999 999 Modbus Register read write I O Set Ch 1A 2607 2657 1 2617 2667 2 2627 2677 3 2637 2687 4 2647 2697 5 r w 302 r w 303 r w 302 r w 303 r w r w 322 r w 321 r w 322 r w Conditions for Parameters to Appear 1B Se Active if Proportional Band is set to 0 and one channel is set to heat and the other to cool Setup Page Active if Alarm 1 Type Setup Page is set to Process Active if Alarm 1 Type Setup Page is set to Proces
231. tal Input 1 Wait for Digital Input 1 ON Clear Wait for Flag Write Modbus Register Write Modbus Register Write Modbus Register 4013 0 4013 2 4012 0 Set Step Type to Ramp i Wait for Digital Input 2 OFF Rate i Write Modbus Register Write Modbus Register 4014 21 4003 2 No Wait Don t Wait for Digital Input 2 Wait for Digital Input 2 ON Write Modbus Register Write Modbus Register 4014 0 4014 2 Wait for input No Wait Y Clear Wait for Flag i Wait for Digital Input 3 OFF Write Modbus Register i Write Modbus Register 4012 0 4015 71 Set Step Type to Soak Doni yvan for Digital Input 3 Wait for Digital Input 3 ON Write Modbus Register M 9 Write Modbus Register 03 3 4015 0 4015 2 Wait for Digital Input 4 OFF Write Modbus Register 1671 No Wait Clear Wait for Flag Don t Wait for Digital Input 4 Wait for Digital Input 4 ON Write Modbus Register Write Modbus Register Write Modbus Register 4012 0 4016 0 4016 2 Digital inputs must be configured as Events before profiling Digital Input 1 to 4 Function Wait for Event and Digital Input 1 to 4 Condition Low or High Modbus Registers 1060 through 1067 See Setup Page Map 7 20 Communications Watlow Series F4S D F4 Modbus Applications Ramp Time Ramp Rate Soak Steps page 2 of 3 Write Modbus Register 4030 0 Write Modbus Register 4030 1 Write Modbus Register 4031 0 Write Modbus Register 4031 1 Write Modbus Register 4
232. tative see back cover of this manual or in the U S dial 1 507 494 5656 For technical support ask for an Applications Engineer Please have the following information available when you call Complete model number All configuration information User s Manual Diagnostic menu readings Warranty The Watlow Series F4 is warranted to be free of defects in material and workmanship for 36 months after delivery tothe first purchaser for use providing that the units have not been misapplied Since Watlow has no control over their use and sometimes misuse we cannot guarantee against failure Watlow s obligations hereunder at Watlow s option are limited to replacement repair or refund of purchase price and parts which upon examination prove to be defective within the warranty period specified This warranty does not apply to damage resulting from transportation alteration misuse or abuse Returns e Call or fax your distributor or the nearest Watlow sales office for best information about returns See outside back cover e Toreturn directly to Watlow Winona in the U S first call or fax Customer Service for a Return Material Authorization RM A number telephone 1 507 454 5300 fax 1 507 452 4507 e Put the RMA number on the shipping label along with on a written description of the problem e Arestocking charge of 20 of the net price is charged for all standard units returned to stock Returned units must be in
233. tegral 1B PID Set 3 Channel 1 r w 000 to 9999 expressed in hundredths of minutes 581 Integral 1B PID Set 4 Channel 1 r w 000 to 9999 expressed in hundredths of minutes 591 Integral 1B PID Set 5 Channel 1 r w 000 to 9999 expressed in hundredths of minutes 2501 Integral 2A PID Set 6 Channel 2 r w 000 to 9999 expressed in hundredths of minutes 2511 Integral 2A PID Set 7 Channel 2 r w 000 to 9999 expressed in hundredths of minutes 2521 Integral 2A PID Set 8 Channel 2 r w 000 to 9999 expressed in hundredths of minutes 2531 Integral 2A PID Set 9 Channel 2 r w 000 to 9999 expressed in hundredths of minutes 2541 Integral 2A PID Set 10 Channel 2 r w 000 to 9999 expressed in hundredths of minutes 2551 Integral 2B PID Set 6 Channel 2 r w 000 to 9999 expressed in hundredths of minutes 2561 Integral 2B PID Set 7 Channel 2 r w 000 to 9999 expressed in hundredths of minutes 2571 Integral 2B PID Set 8 Channel 2 r w 000 to 9999 expressed in hundredths of minutes 2581 Integral 2B PID Set 9 Channel 2 r w 000 to 9999 expressed in hundredths of minutes 2591 Integral 2B PID Set 10 Channel 2 r w 000 to 9999 expressed in hundredths of minutes 1515 Line Frequency Diagnostics r XX 715 Low Power Limit Control Output 1A rw 0 to High Limit 1000 to 9999 expressed in 96 732 Low Power Limit Control Output 1B rw 0 to High Limit 1 expressed in 96 749 Low Power Limit Control Output 2A r w 0 to Hig
234. ter reads 20 000mA Press to store the val ue Volts 5 Connect the volt ammeter to terminals 38 4 and 37 6 Press the Right Key at the Calibrate Out put 2A prompt At the 1 000V prompt press once Use the Up Key O or the Down Key O to adjust the display to the reading on the volt ammeter The controller should stabilize within one second Repeat until the volt amme ter reads 1 000V Press to store the value 7 Press the Right Key at the Calibrate Out put 2A prompt At the 10 000V prompt press once Use the Up Key O or the Down Key O to adjust the display to the reading on the volt ammeter The controller should stabilize within one second Repeat until the volt amme ter reads 10 000V Press to store the value 8 Rewire for operation and verify calibration Output 2B Setup and Calibration 1 Connect the correct power supply to terminals 1 2 and 3 see the Wiring Chapter and the Appendix Milliamperes 2 Connect the volt ammeter to terminals 33 4 and 34 3 Press the Right Key at the Calibrate Out put 2B prompt At the 4 000mA prompt press once Usethe Up Key O or the Down Key OQ to adjust the display to the reading on the volt ammeter The controller should stabilize within one second Repeat until the volt amme ter reads 4 000mA Press to store the value 4 PresstheRight Key at the Calibrate Out put 2B prompt At the 20 000mA prompt press once UsetheUp Key
235. the digital inputs appear as Wait for conditions They must first be configured as events in the Setup Page 6 Why can t delete a particular step of my profile You cannot delete a step that another step jumps to or a step that is an End step T Why can t I delete the End step Because every profile must have an End step and this End step is programmed into the profile If you wish to add a step before the end use the Insert Step command under the Edit Profiles Menu 8 How do start or run a profile You must be on the the Main Page to run a profile Press the Profile K ey select the profile you want to run and choose the step you want to start on 9 just programmed the profile but when press the Profile Key nothing happens What s wrong You must return to the Main Page before running a profile The Profile Key does not function from any other page but the Main Page 10 How do know which profile is running When a profile is running the profile name and current step number is displayed on the Main Page You may have to scroll up or down to find this information 11 Why can t access certain pages menus or parameters The parameters you are looking for may not be available in your model of controller The OEM that installed the F 4 may have locked users out of certain pages and menus The FA s software may have been locked by a su pervisor or someone else at your facility If a profile is
236. ther events outputs are on or off digital outputs must be set up as events in the Setup Page WATLOW Main Page Go to Profiles Go to Setup Go to Factory Press to enter Main Profile gt Create Profile Edit Profile Delete Profile Choose to Name No gt Yes Enter Profile Name _ ALUMINUM8 AV Adjusts Char lt Back gt Next Choose Stepl Type __ Autostart gt Ramp Time Ramp Rate n Choose to wait gt Step does not wait Step waits for 4 4 Profile Programming Watlow Series F4S D how much time it will take to reach set point e what the set point is which PID set to activate and whether you want a guaranteed soak Continue defining step types until your pro file is complete The last step must be an End step 6 Choose the end state All profiles end with an End step which is pre programmed into the new profile Choose Hold set point and event outputs Control off set point off event output sta tus maintained e All Off control outputs and event outputs or e Idle with each channel at user specified set points Event output status maintained T Save your settings When exiting the Profiles Page choose whether to save profile data or restore values Q v NOTE The final step of every profile is End You cannot delete an End step or change it to another type but you can insert new steps before it Get Information fro
237. to 100 expressed in High Scale Retransmit Output 1 Low Scale 1 to 30000 maximum sensor range High Scale Retransmit Output 2 Low Scale 1 to 30000 maximum sensor range Hysteresis 1A Cascade PID Set 1 Channel 1 1 to 30000 ependent on decimal setting Hysteresis 1A Cascade PID Set 2 Channel 1 to 30000 d ependent on decimal setting Hysteresis 1A Cascade PID Set 3 Channel 1 to 30000 d ependent on decimal setting Hysteresis 1A Cascade PID Set 4 Channel 1 to 30000 ependent on decimal setting Hysteresis 1A Cascade PID Set 5 Channel 1 to 30000 d Hysteresis 1A PID 1 to 30000 Hysteresis 1A PID 1 to 30000 d Hysteresis 1A PID 1 to 30000 Hysteresis 1A PID 1 to 30000 Hysteresis 1A PID 1 to 30000 d ependent on decimal setting Set 1 Channel 1 ependent on decimal setting Set 2 Channel 1 ependent on decimal setting Set 3 Channel 1 ependent on decimal setting Set 4 Channel 1 ependent on decimal setting Set 5 Channel 1 ependent on decimal setting Hysteresis 1B Cascade PID Set 1 Channel 1 to 30000 lependent on decimal setting Hysteresis 1B Cascade PID Set 2 Channel 1 to 30000 d ependent on decimal setting Hysteresis 1B Cascade PID Set 3 Channel 1 to 30000 ependent on decimal setting Hysteresis 1B Cascade PID Set 4 Channel 1 to 30000 d ependent on decimal setting Hysteresis 1B Cascade PID Set 5 Channel 1 to 30000 d Hysteresis 1
238. u choose to change a Step Type the Se ROTE STOD n ries F4 will prompt you to program all neces gt Step 1 Autostart sary parameters Step 2 Ramp Time Step 3 Soak To insert a step Move the cursor to the number of the step that the new step will precede Press The Series F4 will prompt you to program all necessary pa rameters of the new step Inserting a step changes the numbers of all steps that follow To delete a step Move the cursor to the number of the step to be deleted Press Deleting a step changes the numbers of all steps that follow AJ ump Step that jumps to an End Step cannot be deleted v NOTE Inserting a step changes the numbers of all steps that follow 4 6 Profile Programming Watlow Series F4S D User Profile Record Copy this record and use it to plan profiles Keep it with a Setup Page Parameter Record to document the controller s programmed settings Profile Name Date Programmed Programmed by Controller checked by Step Step Date Day Wait Set Events Time Rate Set Set PID Guar Jump to Step Repeats End Nmbr Type Time for 12345678 HMS Pt1 Pt2 Set Soak Profile Step Watlow Series F4S D Profile Programming 4 7 A Sample Application Environmental Testing Programming a Profile To test its customers navigational equipment
239. ue Set Point 1 Set Point 2 Power 1 Power 2 Tune Status 1 Tune Status 2 Time Date Digital Inputs Digital Outputs Time Remaining Current File Current Step Active Ch1 PID Set Active Ch2 PID Set Last Jump Step Jump Count Wait For Status Step Type Target Set Point 1 Target Set Point 2 Internal Cascade Set Point Custom Message 1 Custom Message 2 Custom Message 3 Custom Message 4 Input Cal Offset Input2 Cal Offset 32 Input3 Cal Offset Custom Message 1 NO l l l la l la 0 lO O 4cC60n cC C5 oO Co O O1 4 C5 n9 C C3 C2 N23 h2 n3 h2 h2 h2 h2 h2 2 Odd o0 10 0 14 CcC5hn5 Custom Message 2 Custom Message 3 Custom Message 4 Cycle Time type Control Output 1A O Variable Burst 1 Fixed Time Cycle Time Value Control Output 1A number Cycle Time type Control Output 1B O Variable Burst 1 Fixed Time Cycle Time Value Control Output 1B number Cycle Time type Control Output 2A O Variable Burst 1 Fixed Time Cycle Time Value Control Output 2A number Cycle Time type Control Output 2B O Variable Burst 1 Fixed Time Watlow Series F4S D Communications 7 3 2556 Cycle Time Value Control Output 2B 543 Derivative 1A PID Set 5 Channel 1 r w number r w 000 to 999 expressed in hundredths of minutes 2605 Dead Band 1A Cascade PID Set 1 Channel 1 2653 Derivative 1B Cascade PID Set 1 Channel 1 rw 0 to 30000 r w 000 to 999 expressed
240. ure Curve C Single control Time Figure 6 11a Control Lag Times Set Point Outer Loop Process Part Control Outer Loop l PID Set 1 5 Error Signal ES PB x 100 Out l lap Percent Power Outer Loop Process Part 0 to 100 I 0 Cascade Low Range Deviation L1 Inner Loop 100 Cascade High Range Deviation Heat Cascade Inner Loop Q to 100 Input 1 PID Set 1 5 D Inner Loop Error Signal esypg x 100 Out Goo 7 Energy Source 0 to 100 NOTE Cascade Low Range and Cascade High Range Set Points for Input 1 as shown above are setup under Analog In put 3 Refer to Setup Chapter Figure 6 11b Cascade Control outer loop lt thermocouple inner loop thermocouple A limit limit sensor Lube Oil Tank Figure 6 11 Cascade Example Watlow Series F4S D Features 6 11 Notes 6 12 Features Watlow Series F4S D Chapter Seven Communications Exception Responses ssusus 7 2 Modbus Registers Alphabetical Order 7 2 Profiling Registers llselesseesse 7 10 Modbus Registers Numerical Order 7 13 Communications Page Parameter Table 7 16 Profiling Flow Charts 00 0c eee 7 17 Overview The Series F4 uses Modbus as its communications cae Modbus is a stand
241. us Register 25 0 Done with profile No 7 24 Communications Watlow Series F4S D F4 Modbus Applications Naming a Profile Profiles without custom written names are referred to by their numbers Profile 1 Profile 2 etc Follow this procedure to customize the profile name using ASCII equivalent decimal codes in the column labeled Dec in the chart below Renaming a Profile F4 via Modbus Communication Determine file number to Name See list on right Modbus Register File XXXX 3500 3509 1 3510 3519 2 3520 3529 3 3530 3539 4 Write to Modbus Register 3540 3549 5 xxxx File Name Character 3550 3559 6 using decimal equivalent 3560 3569 Y 3570 3579 8 3580 3589 9 File Name 3590 3599 10 Character Dec 3600 3609 11 blank 32 3610 3619 12 0 48 3620 3629 13 1 49 3630 3639 14 Cis ig 2 50 3640 3649 15 m characters 3 51 3650 3659 16 ial been 4 52 3660 3669 17 written 5 53 3670 3679 18 6 54 3680 3689 19 7 55 3690 3699 20 8 56 3700 3709 21 9 57 3710 3719 22 A 65 3720 3729 23 B 66 3730 3739 24 3 G 67 3740 3749 25 Next Modbus Register T D 68 3750 3799 26 E 69 3760 3769 27 P 70 3770 3779 28 G 71 3780 3789 29 H 72 3790 3799 30 l 73 3800 3809 31 J 74 3810 3819 32 K 75 3820 3829 33 Save Changes L 76 3830 3839 34 Write Modbus Register M 77 3840 3849 35 2620 N 78 3850 3859 36 O 79 3860 3869 37 P 80 3870 3879 38 Q 81 3880 3889 3
242. ut 1 Alarm Output 2 ferro Una ooo nannonng ooo ooo poo poonooo000000000 ZL LL OL 6 8 l St vb OL SL pL EL CL HL OL 6 8 94 Electromechanical relay without contact suppression Form C 2 amp off state impedance 31MQ 12 8 Wiring Watlow Series F4S D A WARNING To avoid damage to property and equipment and or injury of loss of life use National Electric Code NEC standard wiring practices to install and operate the Series F4 Failure to do so could result in such damage and or injury or death Digital Outputs x 1 to 8 Figure 12 9a Digital Outputs x 1 to 8 Digital output supply 5V dc 45 Maximum source current 80mA total for all 8 switch dc Open collector Off open 42V dc maximum 10pA On closed 0 2V dc maximum 50mA sink 5V 80mA 17 _ Digital Output 1 18 ooo ooo noooooooooooo000 nnmnnn 5 Digital Output 1 Digital Output Common 26 Digital Sern 8 Digital Output Ground Ze I 0E 62 82 Ze 9 SZ ve ES ele OC 6L 8L ZI Figure 12 9 Open Collector Example 5V 80mA ABL BL Internal Circuitry 50mA max load Figure 12 9c Switched DC Example ro Digital Output 1 E External Load 8L Zh Watlow Series F4S D Wiring 12 9 A WARNING To avoid damage to property and equipment and or injury of los
243. utput is enabled Active if Alarm Output is en abled Active Always Values appear only if the source is enabled Active Always Output Active Always 1 2 5 12 Setup Watlow Series F4S D Setup Page Parameter Table Parameter Description High Scale Set high end of cur rent or voltage range to retransmit Scale Offset Shift the scale up or down to agree with source signal Range Modbus Value Default Low Scale 1 to 30000 High end of Digital Output x 1 to 8 Main gt Setup gt Digital Output x 1 to 8 Name Name the digital output for easy ref erence Function Choose a function for each digital out put Boost Percent Power Enable boost above chosen power level Boost Time Delay Set time to delay boost maximum sensor sensor range Low Scale 1 range to 30000 19999 to 30000 0 0 Range Low to Range High 19999 to 30000 lt selected by user gt DIGIT OUTX ASCII Values Off 0 Off 0 Event Output 1 Complementary Output Digital 5 2 Control Output 1A Control Output 1B Control Output 2A Control Output 2B Boost Heat Digital 6 3 Boost Cool Digital 7 4 Compressor Digital 8 5 0 to 100 for Heat Heat 100 100 to 0 for Cool 100 Cool 100 100 0 to 9999 seconds 30 seconds 0 to 9999 30 Modbus Register read write LO Set Ch 711 728 r w 712 729 r w 3100 Output 1 2
244. ved from the coil form B A single pole single throw relay that us es only the normally closed NC and common con tacts These contacts open when the relay coil is en ergized They close when power is removed from the coil form C A single pole double throw relay that uses the normally open NO normally closed NC and common contacts The operator can choose to wire for a formA or form B contact Hertz Hz Frequency measured in cycles per second hysteresis A change in the process variable re quired to re energize the control or alarm output Sometimes called switching differential integral Control action that automatically elim inates offset or droop between set point and actual process temperature integral control I A form of temperature con trol Thel of PID See integral isolation Electrical separation of sensor from high voltage circuitry Allows use of grounded or ungrounded sensing element JIS See J oint Industrial Standards Joint Industrial Standards JIS AJ apanese agency that establishes and maintains standards for equipment and components Also known as J ISC J apanese Industrial Standards Committee its function is similar to Germany s Deutsche In dustrial Norm DIN junction cold Connection point between ther mocouple metals and the electronic instrument See junction reference junction reference The junction in a thermo couple
245. w Series FAS D Factory Page Parameter Table Modbus Register Range read write Conditions for Parameter Description Modbus Value Default VO Set Ch Parameters to Appear Calibrate Input x 1 to 3 Main Page Factory Calibration Calibrate Input x 1 to 3 0 00mV Thermocouple Yes 1 n Active Always Store 0 000mv cali 1608 2 bration for the ther 1613 3 mocouple input w 50 00mV Thermocouple Yes 2 ira Active Always Store 50 000mv cali 1608 2 bration for the ther 1613 3 mocouple input ud 32 F Type J Yes 3 iu Active Always Store 32 F type J 1608 2 calibration 1613 3 Ww Ground Yes 4 Input Active Always 1603 1 Store calibration for 1608 2 ground at gains of 1 1613 3 and 32 vw Lead Yes 5 Input Active Always 1603 1 Store calibration for 1608 2 lead resistance 1613 3 Ww 15 0 Ohms Yes 6 jos n Active Always Store 15 000 calibra 1608 2 tion for the 1000 1613 3 RTD input A 240 0 Ohms Yes 6 Ec Active Always Store 240 000 cali 1608 2 bration for the 5009 1613 3 or 1kQ RTD input i 380 0 Ohms Yes 7 an i Active Always Store 380 000 cali 1608 2 bration for the 1000 1613 3 RTD input d 6080 0 Ohms Yes 7 TN pu Active Always Store 6080 000 cali 1608 2 bration for the 5000 1613 3 or 1kO RTD input s 0 000V Yes 8 Input Active Always 1603 1 Store 0 000V calibra 1608 2 tion for the process 1613 3 input w 10

User`s Manual Series F4S/D

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents